summaryrefslogtreecommitdiffstats
path: root/docs/htmldocs
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
Diffstat (limited to 'docs/htmldocs')
-rw-r--r--docs/htmldocs/DOMAIN_MEMBER.html21
-rw-r--r--docs/htmldocs/NT_Security.html29
-rw-r--r--docs/htmldocs/Samba-HOWTO-Collection.html4264
-rw-r--r--docs/htmldocs/UNIX_INSTALL.html815
-rw-r--r--docs/htmldocs/lmhosts.5.html4
-rw-r--r--docs/htmldocs/msdfs_setup.html203
-rw-r--r--docs/htmldocs/printer_driver2.html672
-rw-r--r--docs/htmldocs/rpcclient.1.html572
-rw-r--r--docs/htmldocs/smb.conf.5.html2773
-rw-r--r--docs/htmldocs/smbclient.1.html4
-rw-r--r--docs/htmldocs/smbmnt.8.html32
-rw-r--r--docs/htmldocs/smbmount.8.html190
-rw-r--r--docs/htmldocs/smbspool.8.html4
-rw-r--r--docs/htmldocs/smbumount.8.html12
-rw-r--r--docs/htmldocs/using_samba/licenseinfo.html12
-rw-r--r--docs/htmldocs/using_samba/this_edition.html4
-rw-r--r--docs/htmldocs/winbind.html490
17 files changed, 8807 insertions, 1294 deletions
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/DOMAIN_MEMBER.html b/docs/htmldocs/DOMAIN_MEMBER.html
index 6ae8e7a49d1..b16722c51b2 100644
--- a/docs/htmldocs/DOMAIN_MEMBER.html
+++ b/docs/htmldocs/DOMAIN_MEMBER.html
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
-></TITLE
+>security = domain in Samba 2.x</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.57"></HEAD
@@ -15,11 +15,20 @@ ALINK="#0000FF"
><DIV
CLASS="ARTICLE"
><DIV
+CLASS="TITLEPAGE"
+><H1
+CLASS="TITLE"
+><A
+NAME="AEN1"
+>security = domain in Samba 2.x</A
+></H1
+><HR></DIV
+><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
-NAME="AEN2"
+NAME="AEN3"
>Joining an NT Domain with Samba 2.2</A
></H1
><P
@@ -104,11 +113,11 @@ CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>&lt;NT DOMAIN NAME&gt;</I
></TT
->.
- <TT
+>.<TT
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
->&lt;Samba Server Name&gt;</I
+>&lt;Samba
+ Server Name&gt;</I
></TT
>.mac</TT
></P
@@ -242,7 +251,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><HR><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
-NAME="AEN65"
+NAME="AEN66"
>Why is this better than security = server?</A
></H1
><P
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/NT_Security.html b/docs/htmldocs/NT_Security.html
index 8615a7f0dab..081f7fb838a 100644
--- a/docs/htmldocs/NT_Security.html
+++ b/docs/htmldocs/NT_Security.html
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
-></TITLE
+>UNIX Permission Bits and WIndows NT Access Control Lists</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.57"></HEAD
@@ -15,11 +15,20 @@ ALINK="#0000FF"
><DIV
CLASS="ARTICLE"
><DIV
+CLASS="TITLEPAGE"
+><H1
+CLASS="TITLE"
+><A
+NAME="AEN1"
+>UNIX Permission Bits and WIndows NT Access Control Lists</A
+></H1
+><HR></DIV
+><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
-NAME="AEN2"
+NAME="AEN3"
>Viewing and changing UNIX permissions using the NT
security dialogs</A
></H1
@@ -58,7 +67,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><HR><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
-NAME="AEN11"
+NAME="AEN12"
>How to view file security on a Samba share</A
></H1
><P
@@ -110,7 +119,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><HR><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
-NAME="AEN22"
+NAME="AEN23"
>Viewing file ownership</A
></H1
><P
@@ -198,7 +207,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><HR><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
-NAME="AEN42"
+NAME="AEN43"
>Viewing file or directory permissions</A
></H1
><P
@@ -260,7 +269,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><HR><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
-NAME="AEN57"
+NAME="AEN58"
>File Permissions</A
></H2
><P
@@ -322,7 +331,7 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><HR><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
-NAME="AEN71"
+NAME="AEN72"
>Directory Permissions</A
></H2
><P
@@ -354,7 +363,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><HR><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
-NAME="AEN78"
+NAME="AEN79"
>Modifying file or directory permissions</A
></H1
><P
@@ -452,7 +461,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><HR><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
-NAME="AEN100"
+NAME="AEN101"
>Interaction with the standard Samba create mask
parameters</A
></H1
@@ -726,7 +735,7 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><HR><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
-NAME="AEN164"
+NAME="AEN165"
>Interaction with the standard Samba file attribute
mapping</A
></H1
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/Samba-HOWTO-Collection.html b/docs/htmldocs/Samba-HOWTO-Collection.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..cfb6ed37e5d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/htmldocs/Samba-HOWTO-Collection.html
@@ -0,0 +1,4264 @@
+<HTML
+><HEAD
+><TITLE
+>SAMBA Project Documentation</TITLE
+><META
+NAME="GENERATOR"
+CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.57"></HEAD
+><BODY
+CLASS="BOOK"
+BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
+TEXT="#000000"
+LINK="#0000FF"
+VLINK="#840084"
+ALINK="#0000FF"
+><DIV
+CLASS="BOOK"
+><A
+NAME="SAMBA-PROJECT-DOCUMENTATION"
+></A
+><DIV
+CLASS="TITLEPAGE"
+><H1
+CLASS="TITLE"
+><A
+NAME="SAMBA-PROJECT-DOCUMENTATION"
+>SAMBA Project Documentation</A
+></H1
+><H3
+CLASS="AUTHOR"
+><A
+NAME="AEN4"
+>SAMBA Team</A
+></H3
+><HR></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="TOC"
+><DL
+><DT
+><B
+>Table of Contents</B
+></DT
+><DT
+>1. <A
+HREF="#AEN10"
+>How to Install and Test SAMBA</A
+></DT
+><DD
+><DL
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN12"
+>Step 0: Read the man pages</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN20"
+>Step 1: Building the Binaries</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN48"
+>Step 2: The all important step</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN52"
+>Step 3: Create the smb configuration file.</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN66"
+>Step 4: Test your config file with
+ <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>testparm</B
+></A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN72"
+>Step 5: Starting the smbd and nmbd</A
+></DT
+><DD
+><DL
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN82"
+>Step 5a: Starting from inetd.conf</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN111"
+>Step 5b. Alternative: starting it as a daemon</A
+></DT
+></DL
+></DD
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN127"
+>Step 6: Try listing the shares available on your
+ server</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN136"
+>Step 7: Try connecting with the unix client</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN152"
+>Step 8: Try connecting from a DOS, WfWg, Win9x, WinNT,
+ Win2k, OS/2, etc... client</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN166"
+>What If Things Don't Work?</A
+></DT
+><DD
+><DL
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN171"
+>Diagnosing Problems</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN175"
+>Scope IDs</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN178"
+>Choosing the Protocol Level</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN187"
+>Printing from UNIX to a Client PC</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN191"
+>Locking</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN201"
+>Mapping Usernames</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN204"
+>Other Character Sets</A
+></DT
+></DL
+></DD
+></DL
+></DD
+><DT
+>2. <A
+HREF="#AEN207"
+>LanMan and NT Password Encryption in Samba 2.x</A
+></DT
+><DD
+><DL
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN218"
+>Introduction</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN222"
+>How does it work?</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN233"
+>Important Notes About Security</A
+></DT
+><DD
+><DL
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN252"
+>Advantages of SMB Encryption</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN259"
+>Advantages of non-encrypted passwords</A
+></DT
+></DL
+></DD
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN268"
+><A
+NAME="SMBPASSWDFILEFORMAT"
+></A
+>The smbpasswd file</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN320"
+>The smbpasswd Command</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN359"
+>Setting up Samba to support LanManager Encryption</A
+></DT
+></DL
+></DD
+><DT
+>3. <A
+HREF="#AEN374"
+>Hosting a Microsoft Distributed File System tree on Samba</A
+></DT
+><DD
+><DL
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN385"
+>Instructions</A
+></DT
+><DD
+><DL
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN419"
+>Notes</A
+></DT
+></DL
+></DD
+></DL
+></DD
+><DT
+>4. <A
+HREF="#AEN428"
+>Printing Support in Samba 2.2.x</A
+></DT
+><DD
+><DL
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN439"
+>Introduction</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN456"
+>Configuration</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN510"
+>The Imprints Toolset</A
+></DT
+><DD
+><DL
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN514"
+>What is Imprints?</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN524"
+>Creating Printer Driver Packages</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN527"
+>The Imprints server</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN531"
+>The Installation Client</A
+></DT
+></DL
+></DD
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN553"
+><A
+NAME="MIGRATION"
+></A
+>Migration to from Samba 2.0.x to
+ 2.2.x</A
+></DT
+></DL
+></DD
+><DT
+>5. <A
+HREF="#AEN581"
+>security = domain in Samba 2.x</A
+></DT
+><DD
+><DL
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN592"
+>Joining an NT Domain with Samba 2.2</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN655"
+>Why is this better than security = server?</A
+></DT
+></DL
+></DD
+><DT
+>6. <A
+HREF="#AEN669"
+>Unifed Logons between Windows NT and UNIX using Winbind</A
+></DT
+><DD
+><DL
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN687"
+>Abstract</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN691"
+>Introduction</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN704"
+>What Winbind Provides</A
+></DT
+><DD
+><DL
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN711"
+>Target Uses</A
+></DT
+></DL
+></DD
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN715"
+>How Winbind Works</A
+></DT
+><DD
+><DL
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN720"
+>Microsoft Remote Procedure Calls</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN724"
+>Name Service Switch</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN740"
+>Pluggable Authentication Modules</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN748"
+>User and Group ID Allocation</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN752"
+>Result Caching</A
+></DT
+></DL
+></DD
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN755"
+>Installation and Configuration</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN761"
+>Limitations</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN773"
+>Conclusion</A
+></DT
+></DL
+></DD
+><DT
+>7. <A
+HREF="#AEN776"
+>UNIX Permission Bits and WIndows NT Access Control Lists</A
+></DT
+><DD
+><DL
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN787"
+>Viewing and changing UNIX permissions using the NT
+ security dialogs</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN796"
+>How to view file security on a Samba share</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN807"
+>Viewing file ownership</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN827"
+>Viewing file or directory permissions</A
+></DT
+><DD
+><DL
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN842"
+>File Permissions</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN856"
+>Directory Permissions</A
+></DT
+></DL
+></DD
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN863"
+>Modifying file or directory permissions</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN885"
+>Interaction with the standard Samba create mask
+ parameters</A
+></DT
+><DT
+><A
+HREF="#AEN949"
+>Interaction with the standard Samba file attribute
+ mapping</A
+></DT
+></DL
+></DD
+></DL
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="CHAPTER"
+><HR><H1
+><A
+NAME="AEN10"
+>Chapter 1. How to Install and Test SAMBA</A
+></H1
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN12"
+>Step 0: Read the man pages</A
+></H1
+><P
+>The man pages distributed with SAMBA contain
+ lots of useful info that will help to get you started.
+ If you don't know how to read man pages then try
+ something like:</P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PROMPT"
+>$ </TT
+><TT
+CLASS="USERINPUT"
+><B
+>nroff -man smbd.8 | more
+ </B
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+>Other sources of information are pointed to
+ by the Samba web site,<A
+HREF="http://www.samba.org/"
+TARGET="_top"
+> http://www.samba.org</A
+></P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><HR><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN20"
+>Step 1: Building the Binaries</A
+></H1
+><P
+>To do this, first run the program <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>./configure
+ </B
+> in the source directory. This should automatically
+ configure Samba for your operating system. If you have unusual
+ needs then you may wish to run</P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PROMPT"
+>root# </TT
+><TT
+CLASS="USERINPUT"
+><B
+>./configure --help
+ </B
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+>first to see what special options you can enable.
+ Then exectuting</P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PROMPT"
+>root# </TT
+><TT
+CLASS="USERINPUT"
+><B
+>make</B
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+>will create the binaries. Once it's successfully
+ compiled you can use </P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PROMPT"
+>root# </TT
+><TT
+CLASS="USERINPUT"
+><B
+>make install</B
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+>to install the binaries and manual pages. You can
+ separately install the binaries and/or man pages using</P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PROMPT"
+>root# </TT
+><TT
+CLASS="USERINPUT"
+><B
+>make installbin
+ </B
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+>and</P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PROMPT"
+>root# </TT
+><TT
+CLASS="USERINPUT"
+><B
+>make installman
+ </B
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+>Note that if you are upgrading for a previous version
+ of Samba you might like to know that the old versions of
+ the binaries will be renamed with a ".old" extension. You
+ can go back to the previous version with</P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PROMPT"
+>root# </TT
+><TT
+CLASS="USERINPUT"
+><B
+>make revert
+ </B
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+>if you find this version a disaster!</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><HR><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN48"
+>Step 2: The all important step</A
+></H1
+><P
+>At this stage you must fetch yourself a
+ coffee or other drink you find stimulating. Getting the rest
+ of the install right can sometimes be tricky, so you will
+ probably need it.</P
+><P
+>If you have installed samba before then you can skip
+ this step.</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><HR><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN52"
+>Step 3: Create the smb configuration file.</A
+></H1
+><P
+>There are sample configuration files in the examples
+ subdirectory in the distribution. I suggest you read them
+ carefully so you can see how the options go together in
+ practice. See the man page for all the options.</P
+><P
+>The simplest useful configuration file would be
+ something like this:</P
+><P
+><PRE
+CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
+> [global]
+ workgroup = MYGROUP
+
+ [homes]
+ guest ok = no
+ read only = no
+ </PRE
+></P
+><P
+>which would allow connections by anyone with an
+ account on the server, using either their login name or
+ "homes" as the service name. (Note that I also set the
+ workgroup that Samba is part of. See BROWSING.txt for defails)</P
+><P
+>Note that <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>make install</B
+> will not install
+ a <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>smb.conf</TT
+> file. You need to create it
+ yourself. </P
+><P
+>Make sure you put the smb.conf file in the same place
+ you specified in the<TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>Makefile</TT
+> (the default is to
+ look for it in <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>/usr/local/samba/lib/</TT
+>).</P
+><P
+>For more information about security settings for the
+ [homes] share please refer to the document UNIX_SECURITY.txt.</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><HR><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN66"
+>Step 4: Test your config file with
+ <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>testparm</B
+></A
+></H1
+><P
+>It's important that you test the validity of your
+ <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>smb.conf</TT
+> file using the testparm program.
+ If testparm runs OK then it will list the loaded services. If
+ not it will give an error message.</P
+><P
+>Make sure it runs OK and that the services look
+ resonable before proceeding. </P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><HR><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN72"
+>Step 5: Starting the smbd and nmbd</A
+></H1
+><P
+>You must choose to start smbd and nmbd either
+ as daemons or from <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>inetd</B
+>. Don't try
+ to do both! Either you can put them in <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+> inetd.conf</TT
+> and have them started on demand
+ by <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>inetd</B
+>, or you can start them as
+ daemons either from the command line or in <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+> /etc/rc.local</TT
+>. See the man pages for details
+ on the command line options. Take particular care to read
+ the bit about what user you need to be in order to start
+ Samba. In many cases you must be root.</P
+><P
+>The main advantage of starting <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>smbd</B
+>
+ and <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>nmbd</B
+> as a daemon is that they will
+ respond slightly more quickly to an initial connection
+ request. This is, however, unlikely to be a problem.</P
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><HR><H2
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><A
+NAME="AEN82"
+>Step 5a: Starting from inetd.conf</A
+></H2
+><P
+>NOTE; The following will be different if
+ you use NIS or NIS+ to distributed services maps.</P
+><P
+>Look at your <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>/etc/services</TT
+>.
+ What is defined at port 139/tcp. If nothing is defined
+ then add a line like this:</P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="USERINPUT"
+><B
+>netbios-ssn 139/tcp</B
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+>similarly for 137/udp you should have an entry like:</P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="USERINPUT"
+><B
+>netbios-ns 137/udp</B
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+>Next edit your <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>/etc/inetd.conf</TT
+>
+ and add two lines something like this:</P
+><P
+><PRE
+CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
+> netbios-ssn stream tcp nowait root /usr/local/samba/bin/smbd smbd
+ netbios-ns dgram udp wait root /usr/local/samba/bin/nmbd nmbd
+ </PRE
+></P
+><P
+>The exact syntax of <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>/etc/inetd.conf</TT
+>
+ varies between unixes. Look at the other entries in inetd.conf
+ for a guide.</P
+><P
+>NOTE: Some unixes already have entries like netbios_ns
+ (note the underscore) in <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>/etc/services</TT
+>.
+ You must either edit <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>/etc/services</TT
+> or
+ <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>/etc/inetd.conf</TT
+> to make them consistant.</P
+><P
+>NOTE: On many systems you may need to use the
+ "interfaces" option in smb.conf to specify the IP address
+ and netmask of your interfaces. Run <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>ifconfig</B
+>
+ as root if you don't know what the broadcast is for your
+ net. <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>nmbd</B
+> tries to determine it at run
+ time, but fails on somunixes. See the section on "testing nmbd"
+ for a method of finding if you need to do this.</P
+><P
+>!!!WARNING!!! Many unixes only accept around 5
+ parameters on the command line in <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>inetd.conf</TT
+>.
+ This means you shouldn't use spaces between the options and
+ arguments, or you should use a script, and start the script
+ from <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>inetd</B
+>.</P
+><P
+>Restart <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>inetd</B
+>, perhaps just send
+ it a HUP. If you have installed an earlier version of <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+> nmbd</B
+> then you may need to kill nmbd as well.</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><HR><H2
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><A
+NAME="AEN111"
+>Step 5b. Alternative: starting it as a daemon</A
+></H2
+><P
+>To start the server as a daemon you should create
+ a script something like this one, perhaps calling
+ it <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>startsmb</TT
+>.</P
+><P
+><PRE
+CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
+> #!/bin/sh
+ /usr/local/samba/bin/smbd -D
+ /usr/local/samba/bin/nmbd -D
+ </PRE
+></P
+><P
+>then make it executable with <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>chmod
+ +x startsmb</B
+></P
+><P
+>You can then run <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>startsmb</B
+> by
+ hand or execute it from <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>/etc/rc.local</TT
+>
+ </P
+><P
+>To kill it send a kill signal to the processes
+ <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>nmbd</B
+> and <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>smbd</B
+>.</P
+><P
+>NOTE: If you use the SVR4 style init system then
+ you may like to look at the <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>examples/svr4-startup</TT
+>
+ script to make Samba fit into that system.</P
+></DIV
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><HR><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN127"
+>Step 6: Try listing the shares available on your
+ server</A
+></H1
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PROMPT"
+>$ </TT
+><TT
+CLASS="USERINPUT"
+><B
+>smbclient -L
+ <TT
+CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
+><I
+>yourhostname</I
+></TT
+></B
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+>Your should get back a list of shares available on
+ your server. If you don't then something is incorrectly setup.
+ Note that this method can also be used to see what shares
+ are available on other LanManager clients (such as WfWg).</P
+><P
+>If you choose user level security then you may find
+ that Samba requests a password before it will list the shares.
+ See the <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>smbclient</B
+> man page for details. (you
+ can force it to list the shares without a password by
+ adding the option -U% to the command line. This will not work
+ with non-Samba servers)</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><HR><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN136"
+>Step 7: Try connecting with the unix client</A
+></H1
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PROMPT"
+>$ </TT
+><TT
+CLASS="USERINPUT"
+><B
+>smbclient <TT
+CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
+><I
+> //yourhostname/aservice</I
+></TT
+></B
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+>Typically the <TT
+CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
+><I
+>yourhostname</I
+></TT
+>
+ would be the name of the host where you installed <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+> smbd</B
+>. The <TT
+CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
+><I
+>aservice</I
+></TT
+> is
+ any service you have defined in the <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>smb.conf</TT
+>
+ file. Try your user name if you just have a [homes] section
+ in <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>smb.conf</TT
+>.</P
+><P
+>For example if your unix host is bambi and your login
+ name is fred you would type:</P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PROMPT"
+>$ </TT
+><TT
+CLASS="USERINPUT"
+><B
+>smbclient //bambi/fred
+ </B
+></TT
+></P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><HR><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN152"
+>Step 8: Try connecting from a DOS, WfWg, Win9x, WinNT,
+ Win2k, OS/2, etc... client</A
+></H1
+><P
+>Try mounting disks. eg:</P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PROMPT"
+>C:\WINDOWS\&#62; </TT
+><TT
+CLASS="USERINPUT"
+><B
+>net use d: \\servername\service
+ </B
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+>Try printing. eg:</P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PROMPT"
+>C:\WINDOWS\&#62; </TT
+><TT
+CLASS="USERINPUT"
+><B
+>net use lpt1:
+ \\servername\spoolservice</B
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PROMPT"
+>C:\WINDOWS\&#62; </TT
+><TT
+CLASS="USERINPUT"
+><B
+>print filename
+ </B
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+>Celebrate, or send me a bug report!</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><HR><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN166"
+>What If Things Don't Work?</A
+></H1
+><P
+>If nothing works and you start to think "who wrote
+ this pile of trash" then I suggest you do step 2 again (and
+ again) till you calm down.</P
+><P
+>Then you might read the file DIAGNOSIS.txt and the
+ FAQ. If you are still stuck then try the mailing list or
+ newsgroup (look in the README for details). Samba has been
+ successfully installed at thousands of sites worldwide, so maybe
+ someone else has hit your problem and has overcome it. You could
+ also use the WWW site to scan back issues of the samba-digest.</P
+><P
+>When you fix the problem PLEASE send me some updates to the
+ documentation (or source code) so that the next person will find it
+ easier. </P
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><HR><H2
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><A
+NAME="AEN171"
+>Diagnosing Problems</A
+></H2
+><P
+>If you have instalation problems then go to
+ <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>DIAGNOSIS.txt</TT
+> to try to find the
+ problem.</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><HR><H2
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><A
+NAME="AEN175"
+>Scope IDs</A
+></H2
+><P
+>By default Samba uses a blank scope ID. This means
+ all your windows boxes must also have a blank scope ID.
+ If you really want to use a non-blank scope ID then you will
+ need to use the -i &lt;scope&gt; option to nmbd, smbd, and
+ smbclient. All your PCs will need to have the same setting for
+ this to work. I do not recommend scope IDs.</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><HR><H2
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><A
+NAME="AEN178"
+>Choosing the Protocol Level</A
+></H2
+><P
+>The SMB protocol has many dialects. Currently
+ Samba supports 5, called CORE, COREPLUS, LANMAN1,
+ LANMAN2 and NT1.</P
+><P
+>You can choose what maximum protocol to support
+ in the <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>smb.conf</TT
+> file. The default is
+ NT1 and that is the best for the vast majority of sites.</P
+><P
+>In older versions of Samba you may have found it
+ necessary to use COREPLUS. The limitations that led to
+ this have mostly been fixed. It is now less likely that you
+ will want to use less than LANMAN1. The only remaining advantage
+ of COREPLUS is that for some obscure reason WfWg preserves
+ the case of passwords in this protocol, whereas under LANMAN1,
+ LANMAN2 or NT1 it uppercases all passwords before sending them,
+ forcing you to use the "password level=" option in some cases.</P
+><P
+>The main advantage of LANMAN2 and NT1 is support for
+ long filenames with some clients (eg: smbclient, Windows NT
+ or Win95). </P
+><P
+>See the smb.conf(5) manual page for more details.</P
+><P
+>Note: To support print queue reporting you may find
+ that you have to use TCP/IP as the default protocol under
+ WfWg. For some reason if you leave Netbeui as the default
+ it may break the print queue reporting on some systems.
+ It is presumably a WfWg bug.</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><HR><H2
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><A
+NAME="AEN187"
+>Printing from UNIX to a Client PC</A
+></H2
+><P
+>To use a printer that is available via a smb-based
+ server from a unix host you will need to compile the
+ smbclient program. You then need to install the script
+ "smbprint". Read the instruction in smbprint for more details.
+ </P
+><P
+>There is also a SYSV style script that does much
+ the same thing called smbprint.sysv. It contains instructions.</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><HR><H2
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><A
+NAME="AEN191"
+>Locking</A
+></H2
+><P
+>One area which sometimes causes trouble is locking.</P
+><P
+>There are two types of locking which need to be
+ performed by a SMB server. The first is "record locking"
+ which allows a client to lock a range of bytes in a open file.
+ The second is the "deny modes" that are specified when a file
+ is open.</P
+><P
+>Samba supports "record locking" using the fcntl() unix system
+ call. This is often implemented using rpc calls to a rpc.lockd process
+ running on the system that owns the filesystem. Unfortunately many
+ rpc.lockd implementations are very buggy, particularly when made to
+ talk to versions from other vendors. It is not uncommon for the
+ rpc.lockd to crash.</P
+><P
+>There is also a problem translating the 32 bit lock
+ requests generated by PC clients to 31 bit requests supported
+ by most unixes. Unfortunately many PC applications (typically
+ OLE2 applications) use byte ranges with the top bit set
+ as semaphore sets. Samba attempts translation to support
+ these types of applications, and the translation has proved
+ to be quite successful.</P
+><P
+>Strictly a SMB server should check for locks before
+ every read and write call on a file. Unfortunately with the
+ way fcntl() works this can be slow and may overstress the
+ rpc.lockd. It is also almost always unnecessary as clients
+ are supposed to independently make locking calls before reads
+ and writes anyway if locking is important to them. By default
+ Samba only makes locking calls when explicitly asked
+ to by a client, but if you set "strict locking = yes" then it will
+ make lock checking calls on every read and write. </P
+><P
+>You can also disable by range locking completely
+ using "locking = no". This is useful for those shares that
+ don't support locking or don't need it (such as cdroms). In
+ this case Samba fakes the return codes of locking calls to
+ tell clients that everything is OK.</P
+><P
+>The second class of locking is the "deny modes". These
+ are set by an application when it opens a file to determine
+ what types of access should be allowed simultaneously with
+ its open. A client may ask for DENY_NONE, DENY_READ, DENY_WRITE
+ or DENY_ALL. There are also special compatability modes called
+ DENY_FCB and DENY_DOS.</P
+><P
+>You can disable share modes using "share modes = no".
+ This may be useful on a heavily loaded server as the share
+ modes code is very slow. See also the FAST_SHARE_MODES
+ option in the Makefile for a way to do full share modes
+ very fast using shared memory (if your OS supports it).</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><HR><H2
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><A
+NAME="AEN201"
+>Mapping Usernames</A
+></H2
+><P
+>If you have different usernames on the PCs and
+ the unix server then take a look at the "username map" option.
+ See the smb.conf man page for details.</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><HR><H2
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><A
+NAME="AEN204"
+>Other Character Sets</A
+></H2
+><P
+>If you have problems using filenames with accented
+ characters in them (like the German, French or Scandinavian
+ character sets) then I recommmend you look at the "valid chars"
+ option in smb.conf and also take a look at the validchars
+ package in the examples directory.</P
+></DIV
+></DIV
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="CHAPTER"
+><HR><H1
+><A
+NAME="AEN207"
+>Chapter 2. LanMan and NT Password Encryption in Samba 2.x</A
+></H1
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN218"
+>Introduction</A
+></H1
+><P
+>With the development of LanManager and Windows NT
+ compatible password encryption for Samba, it is now able
+ to validate user connections in exactly the same way as
+ a LanManager or Windows NT server.</P
+><P
+>This document describes how the SMB password encryption
+ algorithm works and what issues there are in choosing whether
+ you want to use it. You should read it carefully, especially
+ the part about security and the "PROS and CONS" section.</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><HR><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN222"
+>How does it work?</A
+></H1
+><P
+>LanManager encryption is somewhat similar to UNIX
+ password encryption. The server uses a file containing a
+ hashed value of a user's password. This is created by taking
+ the user's plaintext password, capitalising it, and either
+ truncating to 14 bytes or padding to 14 bytes with null bytes.
+ This 14 byte value is used as two 56 bit DES keys to encrypt
+ a 'magic' eight byte value, forming a 16 byte value which is
+ stored by the server and client. Let this value be known as
+ the "hashed password".</P
+><P
+>Windows NT encryption is a higher quality mechanism,
+ consisting of doing an MD4 hash on a Unicode version of the user's
+ password. This also produces a 16 byte hash value that is
+ non-reversible.</P
+><P
+>When a client (LanManager, Windows for WorkGroups, Windows
+ 95 or Windows NT) wishes to mount a Samba drive (or use a Samba
+ resource), it first requests a connection and negotiates the
+ protocol that the client and server will use. In the reply to this
+ request the Samba server generates and appends an 8 byte, random
+ value - this is stored in the Samba server after the reply is sent
+ and is known as the "challenge". The challenge is different for
+ every client connection.</P
+><P
+>The client then uses the hashed password (16 byte values
+ described above), appended with 5 null bytes, as three 56 bit
+ DES keys, each of which is used to encrypt the challenge 8 byte
+ value, forming a 24 byte value known as the "response".</P
+><P
+>In the SMB call SMBsessionsetupX (when user level security
+ is selected) or the call SMBtconX (when share level security is
+ selected), the 24 byte response is returned by the client to the
+ Samba server. For Windows NT protocol levels the above calculation
+ is done on both hashes of the user's password and both responses are
+ returned in the SMB call, giving two 24 byte values.</P
+><P
+>The Samba server then reproduces the above calculation, using
+ its own stored value of the 16 byte hashed password (read from the
+ <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>smbpasswd</TT
+> file - described later) and the challenge
+ value that it kept from the negotiate protocol reply. It then checks
+ to see if the 24 byte value it calculates matches the 24 byte value
+ returned to it from the client.</P
+><P
+>If these values match exactly, then the client knew the
+ correct password (or the 16 byte hashed value - see security note
+ below) and is thus allowed access. If not, then the client did not
+ know the correct password and is denied access.</P
+><P
+>Note that the Samba server never knows or stores the cleartext
+ of the user's password - just the 16 byte hashed values derived from
+ it. Also note that the cleartext password or 16 byte hashed values
+ are never transmitted over the network - thus increasing security.</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><HR><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN233"
+>Important Notes About Security</A
+></H1
+><P
+>The unix and SMB password encryption techniques seem similar
+ on the surface. This similarity is, however, only skin deep. The unix
+ scheme typically sends clear text passwords over the nextwork when
+ logging in. This is bad. The SMB encryption scheme never sends the
+ cleartext password over the network but it does store the 16 byte
+ hashed values on disk. This is also bad. Why? Because the 16 byte hashed
+ values are a "password equivalent". You cannot derive the user's
+ password from them, but they could potentially be used in a modified
+ client to gain access to a server. This would require considerable
+ technical knowledge on behalf of the attacker but is perfectly possible.
+ You should thus treat the smbpasswd file as though it contained the
+ cleartext passwords of all your users. Its contents must be kept
+ secret, and the file should be protected accordingly.</P
+><P
+>Ideally we would like a password scheme which neither requires
+ plain text passwords on the net or on disk. Unfortunately this
+ is not available as Samba is stuck with being compatible with
+ other SMB systems (WinNT, WfWg, Win95 etc). </P
+><DIV
+CLASS="WARNING"
+><P
+></P
+><TABLE
+CLASS="WARNING"
+BORDER="1"
+WIDTH="100%"
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="CENTER"
+><B
+>Warning</B
+></TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+><P
+>Note that Windows NT 4.0 Service pack 3 changed the
+ default for permissible authentication so that plaintext
+ passwords are <I
+CLASS="EMPHASIS"
+>never</I
+> sent over the wire.
+ The solution to this is either to switch to encrypted passwords
+ with Samba or edit the Windows NT registry to re-enable plaintext
+ passwords. See the document WinNT.txt for details on how to do
+ this.</P
+><P
+>Other Microsoft operating systems which also exhibit
+ this behavior includes</P
+><P
+></P
+><UL
+><LI
+><P
+>MS DOS Network client 3.0 with
+ the basic network redirector installed</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>Windows 95 with the network redirector
+ update installed</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>Windows 98 [se]</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>Windows 2000</P
+></LI
+></UL
+><P
+><I
+CLASS="EMPHASIS"
+>Note :</I
+>All current release of
+ Microsoft SMB/CIFS clients support authentication via the
+ SMB Challenge/Response mechanism described here. Enabling
+ clear text authentication does not disable the ability
+ of the client to particpate in encrypted authentication.</P
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><HR><H2
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><A
+NAME="AEN252"
+>Advantages of SMB Encryption</A
+></H2
+><P
+></P
+><UL
+><LI
+><P
+>plain text passwords are not passed across
+ the network. Someone using a network sniffer cannot just
+ record passwords going to the SMB server.</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>WinNT doesn't like talking to a server
+ that isn't using SMB encrypted passwords. It will refuse
+ to browse the server if the server is also in user level
+ security mode. It will insist on prompting the user for the
+ password on each connection, which is very annoying. The
+ only things you can do to stop this is to use SMB encryption.
+ </P
+></LI
+></UL
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><HR><H2
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><A
+NAME="AEN259"
+>Advantages of non-encrypted passwords</A
+></H2
+><P
+></P
+><UL
+><LI
+><P
+>plain text passwords are not kept
+ on disk. </P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>uses same password file as other unix
+ services such as login and ftp</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>you are probably already using other
+ services (such as telnet and ftp) which send plain text
+ passwords over the net, so sending them for SMB isn't
+ such a big deal.</P
+></LI
+></UL
+></DIV
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><HR><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN268"
+><A
+NAME="SMBPASSWDFILEFORMAT"
+></A
+>The smbpasswd file</A
+></H1
+><P
+>In order for Samba to participate in the above protocol
+ it must be able to look up the 16 byte hashed values given a user name.
+ Unfortunately, as the UNIX password value is also a one way hash
+ function (ie. it is impossible to retrieve the cleartext of the user's
+ password given the UNIX hash of it), a separate password file
+ containing this 16 byte value must be kept. To minimise problems with
+ these two password files, getting out of sync, the UNIX <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+> /etc/passwd</TT
+> and the <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>smbpasswd</TT
+> file,
+ a utility, <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>mksmbpasswd.sh</B
+>, is provided to generate
+ a smbpasswd file from a UNIX <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>/etc/passwd</TT
+> file.
+ </P
+><P
+>To generate the smbpasswd file from your <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>/etc/passwd
+ </TT
+> file use the following command :</P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PROMPT"
+>$ </TT
+><TT
+CLASS="USERINPUT"
+><B
+>cat /etc/passwd | mksmbpasswd.sh
+ &gt; /usr/local/samba/private/smbpasswd</B
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+>If you are running on a system that uses NIS, use</P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PROMPT"
+>$ </TT
+><TT
+CLASS="USERINPUT"
+><B
+>ypcat passwd | mksmbpasswd.sh
+ &gt; /usr/local/samba/private/smbpasswd</B
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+>The <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>mksmbpasswd.sh</B
+> program is found in
+ the Samba source directory. By default, the smbpasswd file is
+ stored in :</P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>/usr/local/samba/private/smbpasswd</TT
+></P
+><P
+>The owner of the <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>/usr/local/samba/private/</TT
+>
+ directory should be set to root, and the permissions on it should
+ be set to 0500 (<B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>chmod 500 /usr/local/samba/private</B
+>).
+ </P
+><P
+>Likewise, the smbpasswd file inside the private directory should
+ be owned by root and the permissions on is should be set to 0600
+ (<B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>chmod 600 smbpasswd</B
+>).</P
+><P
+>The format of the smbpasswd file is (The line has been
+ wrapped here. It should appear as one entry per line in
+ your smbpasswd file.)</P
+><P
+><PRE
+CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
+>username:uid:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX:
+ [Account type]:LCT-&lt;last-change-time&gt;:Long name
+ </PRE
+></P
+><P
+>Although only the <TT
+CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
+><I
+>username</I
+></TT
+>,
+ <TT
+CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
+><I
+>uid</I
+></TT
+>, <TT
+CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
+><I
+> XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX</I
+></TT
+>,
+ [<TT
+CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
+><I
+>Account type</I
+></TT
+>] and <TT
+CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
+><I
+> last-change-time</I
+></TT
+> sections are significant
+ and are looked at in the Samba code.</P
+><P
+>It is <I
+CLASS="EMPHASIS"
+>VITALLY</I
+> important that there by 32
+ 'X' characters between the two ':' characters in the XXX sections -
+ the smbpasswd and Samba code will fail to validate any entries that
+ do not have 32 characters between ':' characters. The first XXX
+ section is for the Lanman password hash, the second is for the
+ Windows NT version.</P
+><P
+>When the password file is created all users have password entries
+ consisting of 32 'X' characters. By default this disallows any access
+ as this user. When a user has a password set, the 'X' characters change
+ to 32 ascii hexadecimal digits (0-9, A-F). These are an ascii
+ representation of the 16 byte hashed value of a user's password.</P
+><P
+>To set a user to have no password (not recommended), edit the file
+ using vi, and replace the first 11 characters with the ascii text
+ <TT
+CLASS="CONSTANT"
+>"NO PASSWORD"</TT
+> (minus the quotes).</P
+><P
+>For example, to clear the password for user bob, his smbpasswd file
+ entry would look like :</P
+><P
+><PRE
+CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
+> bob:100:NO PASSWORDXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX:XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX:[U ]:LCT-00000000:Bob's full name:/bobhome:/bobshell
+ </PRE
+></P
+><P
+>If you are allowing users to use the smbpasswd command to set
+ their own passwords, you may want to give users NO PASSWORD initially
+ so they do not have to enter a previous password when changing to their
+ new password (not recommended). In order for you to allow this the
+ <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>smbpasswd</B
+> program must be able to connect to the
+ <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>smbd</B
+> daemon as that user with no password. Enable this
+ by adding the line :</P
+><P
+><B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>null passwords = yes</B
+></P
+><P
+>to the [global] section of the smb.conf file (this is why
+ the above scenario is not recommended). Preferably, allocate your
+ users a default password to begin with, so you do not have
+ to enable this on your server.</P
+><P
+><I
+CLASS="EMPHASIS"
+>Note : </I
+>This file should be protected very
+ carefully. Anyone with access to this file can (with enough knowledge of
+ the protocols) gain access to your SMB server. The file is thus more
+ sensitive than a normal unix <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>/etc/passwd</TT
+> file.</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><HR><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN320"
+>The smbpasswd Command</A
+></H1
+><P
+>The smbpasswd command maintains the two 32 byte password fields
+ in the smbpasswd file. If you wish to make it similar to the unix
+ <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>passwd</B
+> or <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>yppasswd</B
+> programs,
+ install it in <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>/usr/local/samba/bin/</TT
+> (or your
+ main Samba binary directory).</P
+><P
+>Note that as of Samba 1.9.18p4 this program <I
+CLASS="EMPHASIS"
+>MUST NOT
+ BE INSTALLED</I
+> setuid root (the new <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>smbpasswd</B
+>
+ code enforces this restriction so it cannot be run this way by
+ accident).</P
+><P
+><B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>smbpasswd</B
+> now works in a client-server mode
+ where it contacts the local smbd to change the user's password on its
+ behalf. This has enormous benefits - as follows.</P
+><P
+></P
+><UL
+><LI
+><P
+>smbpasswd no longer has to be setuid root -
+ an enormous range of potential security problems is
+ eliminated.</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+><B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>smbpasswd</B
+> now has the capability
+ to change passwords on Windows NT servers (this only works when
+ the request is sent to the NT Primary Domain Controller if you
+ are changing an NT Domain user's password).</P
+></LI
+></UL
+><P
+>To run smbpasswd as a normal user just type :</P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PROMPT"
+>$ </TT
+><TT
+CLASS="USERINPUT"
+><B
+>smbpasswd</B
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PROMPT"
+>Old SMB password: </TT
+><TT
+CLASS="USERINPUT"
+><B
+>&lt;type old value here -
+ or hit return if there was no old password&gt;</B
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PROMPT"
+>New SMB Password: </TT
+><TT
+CLASS="USERINPUT"
+><B
+>&lt;type new value&gt;
+ </B
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PROMPT"
+>Repeat New SMB Password: </TT
+><TT
+CLASS="USERINPUT"
+><B
+>&lt;re-type new value
+ </B
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+>If the old value does not match the current value stored for
+ that user, or the two new values do not match each other, then the
+ password will not be changed.</P
+><P
+>If invoked by an ordinary user it will only allow the user
+ to change his or her own Samba password.</P
+><P
+>If run by the root user smbpasswd may take an optional
+ argument, specifying the user name whose SMB password you wish to
+ change. Note that when run as root smbpasswd does not prompt for
+ or check the old password value, thus allowing root to set passwords
+ for users who have forgotten their passwords.</P
+><P
+><B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>smbpasswd</B
+> is designed to work in the same way
+ and be familiar to UNIX users who use the <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>passwd</B
+> or
+ <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>yppasswd</B
+> commands.</P
+><P
+>For more details on using <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>smbpasswd</B
+> refer
+ to the man page which will always be the definitive reference.</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><HR><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN359"
+>Setting up Samba to support LanManager Encryption</A
+></H1
+><P
+>This is a very brief description on how to setup samba to
+ support password encryption. </P
+><P
+></P
+><OL
+TYPE="1"
+><LI
+><P
+>compile and install samba as usual</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>enable encrypted passwords in <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+> smb.conf</TT
+> by adding the line <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>encrypt
+ passwords = yes</B
+> in the [global] section</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>create the initial <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>smbpasswd</TT
+>
+ password file in the place you specified in the Makefile
+ (--prefix=&lt;dir&gt;). See the notes under the <A
+HREF="#SMBPASSWDFILEFORMAT"
+>The smbpasswd File</A
+>
+ section earlier in the document for details.</P
+></LI
+></OL
+><P
+>Note that you can test things using smbclient.</P
+></DIV
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="CHAPTER"
+><HR><H1
+><A
+NAME="AEN374"
+>Chapter 3. Hosting a Microsoft Distributed File System tree on Samba</A
+></H1
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN385"
+>Instructions</A
+></H1
+><P
+>The Distributed File System (or Dfs) provides a means of
+ separating the logical view of files and directories that users
+ see from the actual physical locations of these resources on the
+ network. It allows for higher availability, smoother storage expansion,
+ load balancing etc. For more information about Dfs, refer to <A
+HREF="http://www.microsoft.com/NTServer/nts/downloads/winfeatures/NTSDistrFile/AdminGuide.asp"
+TARGET="_top"
+> Microsoft documentation</A
+>. </P
+><P
+>This document explains how to host a Dfs tree on a Unix
+ machine (for Dfs-aware clients to browse) using Samba.</P
+><P
+>A Samba server can be made a Dfs server by setting the global
+ boolean <A
+HREF="smb.conf.5.html#HOSTMSDFS"
+TARGET="_top"
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+> host msdfs</I
+></TT
+></A
+> parameter in the <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>smb.conf
+ </TT
+> file. You designate a share as a Dfs root using the share
+ level boolean <A
+HREF="smb.conf.5.html#MSDFSROOT"
+TARGET="_top"
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+> msdfs root</I
+></TT
+></A
+> parameter. A Dfs root directory on
+ Samba hosts Dfs links in the form of symbolic links that point
+ to other servers. For example, a symbolic link
+ <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>junction-&gt;msdfs:storage1&bsol;share1</TT
+> in
+ the share directory acts as the Dfs junction. When Dfs-aware
+ clients attempt to access the junction link, they are redirected
+ to the storage location (in this case, \\storage1\share1).</P
+><P
+>Dfs trees on Samba work with all Dfs-aware clients ranging
+ from Windows 95 to 2000.</P
+><P
+>Here's an example of setting up a Dfs tree on a Samba
+ server.</P
+><P
+><PRE
+CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
+># The smb.conf file:
+[global]
+ netbios name = SAMBA
+ host msdfs = yes
+
+[dfs]
+ path = /export/dfsroot
+ msdfs root = yes
+ </PRE
+></P
+><P
+>In the /export/dfsroot directory we set up our dfs links to
+ other servers on the network.</P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PROMPT"
+>root# </TT
+><TT
+CLASS="USERINPUT"
+><B
+>cd /export/dfsroot</B
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PROMPT"
+>root# </TT
+><TT
+CLASS="USERINPUT"
+><B
+>chown root /export/dfsroot</B
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PROMPT"
+>root# </TT
+><TT
+CLASS="USERINPUT"
+><B
+>chmod 755 /export/dfsroot</B
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PROMPT"
+>root# </TT
+><TT
+CLASS="USERINPUT"
+><B
+>ln -s msdfs:storageA\\shareA linka</B
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PROMPT"
+>root# </TT
+><TT
+CLASS="USERINPUT"
+><B
+>ln -s msdfs:serverB\\share,serverC\\share linkb</B
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+>You should set up the permissions and ownership of
+ the directory acting as the Dfs root such that only designated
+ users can create, delete or modify the msdfs links. Also note
+ that symlink names should be all lowercase. This limitation exists
+ to have Samba avoid trying all the case combinations to get at
+ the link name. Finally set up the symbolic links to point to the
+ network shares you want, and start Samba.</P
+><P
+>Users on Dfs-aware clients can now browse the Dfs tree
+ on the Samba server at \\samba\dfs. Accessing
+ links linka or linkb (which appear as directories to the client)
+ takes users directly to the appropriate shares on the network.</P
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><HR><H2
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><A
+NAME="AEN419"
+>Notes</A
+></H2
+><P
+></P
+><UL
+><LI
+><P
+>Windows clients need to be rebooted
+ if a previously mounted non-dfs share is made a dfs
+ root or vice versa. A better way is to introduce a
+ new share and make it the dfs root.</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>Currently there's a restriction that msdfs
+ symlink names should all be lowercase.</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>For security purposes, the directory
+ acting as the root of the Dfs tree should have ownership
+ and permissions set so that only designated users can
+ modify the symbolic links in the directory.</P
+></LI
+></UL
+></DIV
+></DIV
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="CHAPTER"
+><HR><H1
+><A
+NAME="AEN428"
+>Chapter 4. Printing Support in Samba 2.2.x</A
+></H1
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN439"
+>Introduction</A
+></H1
+><P
+>Beginning with the 2.2.0 release, Samba now supports
+ the native Windows NT printing mechanisms implemented via
+ MS-RPC (i.e. the SPOOLSS named pipe). Previous versions of
+ Samba only supported the LanMan printing calls.</P
+><P
+>The additional functionality provided by the new
+ SPOOLSS support includes:</P
+><P
+></P
+><UL
+><LI
+><P
+>Support for downloading printer driver
+ files to Windows 95/98/NT/2000 clients upon demand.
+ </P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>Uploading of printer drivers via the
+ Windows NT Add Printer Wizard (APW) or the <A
+HREF="http://imprints.sourceforge.net"
+TARGET="_top"
+>Imprints tool set
+ </A
+></P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>Support for the native MS-RPC printing
+ calls such as StartDocPrinter, EnumJobs(), etc... (See
+ the <A
+HREF="http://msdn.microsoft.com/"
+TARGET="_top"
+>MSDN documentation
+ </A
+> for more information on the Win32 printing API)
+ </P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>Support for NT Access Control Lists (ACL)
+ on printer objects</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>Improved support for printer queue manipulation
+ through the use of an internal database for spooled job
+ information</P
+></LI
+></UL
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><HR><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN456"
+>Configuration</A
+></H1
+><P
+>In order to support the uploading of printer driver
+ files, you must first configure a file share named [print$].
+ The name of this share is hard coded in Samba's internals so
+ the name is very important (print$ is the service used by
+ Windows NT print servers to provide support for printer driver
+ download.</P
+><DIV
+CLASS="WARNING"
+><P
+></P
+><TABLE
+CLASS="WARNING"
+BORDER="1"
+WIDTH="100%"
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="CENTER"
+><B
+>Warning</B
+></TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+><P
+>Previous versions of Samba recommended using
+ a share named [printer$]. This name was taken from the
+ printer$ service created by Windows 9x clients when a
+ printer was shared. Windows 9x printer servers always have
+ a printer$ service which provides read-only access via no
+ password in order to support printer driver downloads.</P
+><P
+>However, the initial implementation allowed for a
+ parameter named <TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>printer driver location</I
+></TT
+>
+ to be used on a per share basis to specify the location of
+ the driver files associated with that printer. Another
+ parameter named <TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>printer driver</I
+></TT
+> provided
+ a means of defining the printer driver name to be sent to
+ the client.</P
+><P
+>These parameters, including <TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>printer driver
+ file</I
+></TT
+> parameter, are being depreciated and should not
+ be used in new installations. For more information on this change,
+ you should refer to the <A
+HREF="#MIGRATION"
+>Migration section
+ </A
+>of this document.</P
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+><P
+>You should modify the server's smb.conf file to create the
+ following file share (of course, some of the parameter values,
+ such as 'path' are arbitrary and should be replaced with
+ appropriate values for your site):</P
+><P
+><PRE
+CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
+>[print$]
+ path = /usr/local/samba/printers
+ guest ok = yes
+ browseable = yes
+ read only = yes
+ write list = ntadmin
+ </PRE
+></P
+><P
+>The <A
+HREF="smb./conf.5.html#WRITELIST"
+TARGET="_top"
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+> write list</I
+></TT
+></A
+> is used to allow administrative
+ level user accounts to have write access in order to update files
+ on the share. See the <A
+HREF="smb./conf.5.html"
+TARGET="_top"
+> smb.conf(5) man page</A
+> for more information on
+ configuring file shares.</P
+><P
+>The requirement for <A
+HREF="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTOK"
+TARGET="_top"
+><B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+> guest ok = yes</B
+></A
+> depends upon how your
+ site is configured. If users will be guaranteed to have
+ an account on the Samba host, then this is a non-issue.</P
+><P
+><I
+CLASS="EMPHASIS"
+>author's note: </I
+>The non-issue is that
+ if all your Windows NT users are guarenteed to be authenticated
+ by the Samba server (such as a domain member server and the NT
+ user has already been validated by the Domain Controller in
+ order to logon to the Windows NT console), then guest access
+ is not necessary. Of course, in a workgroup environment where
+ you just want to be able to print without worrying about
+ silly accounts and security, then configure the share for
+ guest access. You'll probably want to add <A
+HREF="smb.conf.5.html#MAPTOGUEST"
+TARGET="_top"
+><B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>map to guest = Bad User
+ </B
+></A
+> in the [global] section as well. Make sure
+ you understand what this parameter does before using it
+ though. --jerry]</P
+><P
+>In order for a Windows NT print server to support
+ the downloading of driver files by multiple client architectures,
+ it must create subdirectories within the [print$] service
+ which correspond to each of the supported client architectures.
+ Samba follows this model as well.</P
+><P
+>Next create the directory tree below the [print$] share
+ for each architecture you wish to support.</P
+><P
+><PRE
+CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
+> [print$]-----
+ |-W32X86 ; "Windows NT x86"
+ |-WIN40 ; "Windows 95/98"
+ |-W32ALPHA ; "Windows NT Alpha_AXP"
+ |-W32MIPS ; "Windows NT R4000"
+ |-W32PPC ; "Windows NT PowerPC"
+ </PRE
+></P
+><DIV
+CLASS="WARNING"
+><P
+></P
+><TABLE
+CLASS="WARNING"
+BORDER="1"
+WIDTH="100%"
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="CENTER"
+><B
+>Warning</B
+></TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+><P
+><I
+CLASS="EMPHASIS"
+>ATTENTION! REQUIRED PERMISSIONS</I
+></P
+><P
+>In order to currently add a new driver to you Samba host,
+ one of two conditions must hold true:</P
+><P
+></P
+><UL
+><LI
+><P
+>The account used to connect to the Samba host
+ must have a uid of 0 (i.e. a root account)</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>The account used to connect to the Samba host
+ must be a member of the <A
+HREF="smb.conf.5.html"
+TARGET="_top"
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+> printer admin</I
+></TT
+></A
+> list.</P
+></LI
+></UL
+><P
+>Of course, the connected account must still possess access
+ to add files to the sibdirectories beneath [print$].</P
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+><P
+>Once you have created the required [print$] service and
+ associated subdirectories, simply log onto the Samba server using
+ a root (or <TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>printer admin</I
+></TT
+>) account
+ from a Windows NT 4.0 client. Navigate to the "Printers" folder
+ on the Samba server. You should see an initial listing of printers
+ that matches the printer shares defined on your Samba host.</P
+><P
+>It is possible on a Windows NT print server to have printers
+ listed in the Printers folder which are not shared. Samba does
+ not make this distinction. By definition, the only printers of
+ which Samba is aware are those which are specified as shares in
+ <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>smb.conf</TT
+>.</P
+><P
+>Another interesting side note is that Windows NT clients do
+ not use the SMB printer share, but rather can print directly
+ to any printer on another Windows NT host using MS-RPC. This
+ of course assumes that the printing client has the necessary
+ privileges on the remote host serving the printer. The default
+ permissions assigned by Windows NT to a printer gives the "Print"
+ permissions to the "Everyone" well-known group.</P
+><P
+>The initial listing of printers in the Samba host's
+ Printers folder will have no printer driver assigned to them.
+ The way assign a driver to a printer is to view the Properties
+ of the printer and either</P
+><P
+></P
+><UL
+><LI
+><P
+>Use the "New Driver..." button to install
+ a new printer driver, or</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>Select a driver from the popup list of
+ installed drivers. Initially this list will be empty.</P
+></LI
+></UL
+><P
+>If you wish to install printer drivers for client
+ operating systems other than "Windows NT x86", you will need
+ to use the "Sharing" tab of the printer properties dialog.</P
+><P
+>Assuming you have connected with a root account, you
+ will also be able modify other printer properties such as
+ ACLs and device settings using this dialog box.</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><HR><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN510"
+>The Imprints Toolset</A
+></H1
+><P
+>The Imprints tool set provides a UNIX equivalent of the
+ Windows NT Add Printer Wizard. For complete information, please
+ refer to the Imprints web site at <A
+HREF="http://imprints.sourceforge.net/"
+TARGET="_top"
+> http://imprints.sourceforge.net/</A
+> as well as the documentation
+ included with the imprints source distribution. This section will
+ only provide a brief introduction to the features of Imprints.</P
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><HR><H2
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><A
+NAME="AEN514"
+>What is Imprints?</A
+></H2
+><P
+>Imprints is a collection of tools for supporting the goals
+ of</P
+><P
+></P
+><UL
+><LI
+><P
+>Providing a central repository information
+ regarding Windows NT and 95/98 printer driver packages</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>Providing the tools necessary for creating
+ the Imprints printer driver packages.</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>Providing an installation client which
+ will obtain and install printer drivers on remote Samba
+ and Windows NT 4 print servers.</P
+></LI
+></UL
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><HR><H2
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><A
+NAME="AEN524"
+>Creating Printer Driver Packages</A
+></H2
+><P
+>The process of creating printer driver packages is beyond
+ the scope of this document (refer to Imprints.txt also included
+ with the Samba distribution for more information). In short,
+ an Imprints driver package is a gzipped tarball containing the
+ driver files, related INF files, and a control file needed by the
+ installation client.</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><HR><H2
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><A
+NAME="AEN527"
+>The Imprints server</A
+></H2
+><P
+>The Imprints server is really a database server that
+ may be queried via standard HTTP mechanisms. Each printer
+ entry in the database has an associated URL for the actual
+ downloading of the package. Each package is digitally signed
+ via GnuPG which can be used to verify that package downloaded
+ is actually the one referred in the Imprints database. It is
+ <I
+CLASS="EMPHASIS"
+>not</I
+> recommended that this security check
+ be disabled.</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><HR><H2
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><A
+NAME="AEN531"
+>The Installation Client</A
+></H2
+><P
+>More information regarding the Imprints installation client
+ is available in the <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>Imprints-Client-HOWTO.ps</TT
+>
+ file included with the imprints source package.</P
+><P
+>The Imprints installation client comes in two forms.</P
+><P
+></P
+><UL
+><LI
+><P
+>a set of command line Perl scripts</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>a GTK+ based graphical interface to
+ the command line perl scripts</P
+></LI
+></UL
+><P
+>The installation client (in both forms) provides a means
+ of querying the Imprints database server for a matching
+ list of known printer model names as well as a means to
+ download and install the drivers on remote Samba and Windows
+ NT print servers.</P
+><P
+>The basic installation process is in four steps and
+ perl code is wrapped around <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>smbclient</B
+>
+ and <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>rpcclient</B
+>.</P
+><P
+><PRE
+CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
+>
+ foreach (supported architecture for a given driver)
+ {
+ 1. rpcclient: Get the appropriate upload directory
+ on the remote server
+ 2. smbclient: Upload the driver files
+ 3. rpcclient: Issues an AddPrinterDriver() MS-RPC
+ }
+
+ 4. rpcclient: Issue an AddPrinterEx() MS-RPC to actually
+ create the printer
+ </PRE
+></P
+><P
+>One of the problems encountered when implementing
+ the Imprints tool set was the name space issues between
+ various supported client architectures. For example, Windows
+ NT includes a driver named "Apple LaserWriter II NTX v51.8"
+ and Windows 95 callsits version of this driver "Apple
+ LaserWriter II NTX"</P
+><P
+>The problem is how to know what client drivers have
+ been uploaded for a printer. As astute reader will remember
+ that the Windows NT Printer Properties dialog only includes
+ space for one printer driver name. A quick look in the
+ Windows NT 4.0 system registry at</P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>HKLM\System\CurrentControlSet\Control\Print\Environment
+ </TT
+></P
+><P
+>will reveal that Windows NT always uses the NT driver
+ name. The is ok as Windows NT always requires that at least
+ the Windows NT version of the printer driver is present.
+ However, Samba does not have the requirement internally.
+ Therefore, how can you use the NT driver name if is has not
+ already been installed?</P
+><P
+>The way of sidestepping this limitation is to require
+ that all Imprints printer driver packages include both the Intel
+ Windows NT and 95/98 printer drivers and that NT driver is
+ installed first.</P
+></DIV
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><HR><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN553"
+><A
+NAME="MIGRATION"
+></A
+>Migration to from Samba 2.0.x to
+ 2.2.x</A
+></H1
+><P
+>Given that printer driver management has changed
+ (we hope improved :) ) in 2.2.0 over prior releases,
+ migration from an existing setup to 2.2.0 can follow
+ several paths.</P
+><DIV
+CLASS="WARNING"
+><P
+></P
+><TABLE
+CLASS="WARNING"
+BORDER="1"
+WIDTH="100%"
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="CENTER"
+><B
+>Warning</B
+></TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+><P
+>The following smb.conf parameters are considered to be
+ depreciated and will be removed soon. Do not use them
+ in new installations</P
+><P
+></P
+><UL
+><LI
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>printer driver file (G)</I
+></TT
+>
+ </P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>printer driver (S)</I
+></TT
+>
+ </P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>printer driver location (S)</I
+></TT
+>
+ </P
+></LI
+></UL
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+><P
+>Here are the possible scenarios for supporting migration:</P
+><P
+></P
+><UL
+><LI
+><P
+>If you does not desire the new Windows NT
+ print driver support, nothing needs to be done.
+ All existing parameters work the same.</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>If you want to take advantage of NT printer
+ driver support but does not want to migrate the
+ 9x drivers to the new setup, the leave the existing
+ printers.def file. When smbd attempts to locate a
+ 9x driver for the printer in the TDB and fails it
+ will drop down to using the printers.def (and all
+ associated parameters). The <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>make_printerdef</B
+>
+ tool will also remain for backwards compatibility but will
+ be moved to the "this tool is the old way of doing it"
+ pile.</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>If you install a Windows 9x driver for a printer
+ on your Samba host (in the printing TDB), this information will
+ take precedence and the three old printing parameters
+ will be ignored (including print driver location).</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>If you want to migrate an existing <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+> printers.def</TT
+> file into the new setup, the current only
+ solution is to use the Windows NT APW to install the NT drivers
+ and the 9x drivers. (comment: this could possibly be scripted
+ using smbclient and rpcclient, but I haven't had time --jerry)
+ </P
+></LI
+></UL
+></DIV
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="CHAPTER"
+><HR><H1
+><A
+NAME="AEN581"
+>Chapter 5. security = domain in Samba 2.x</A
+></H1
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN592"
+>Joining an NT Domain with Samba 2.2</A
+></H1
+><P
+>In order for a Samba-2 server to join an NT domain,
+ you must first add the NetBIOS name of the Samba server to the
+ NT domain on the PDC using Server Manager for Domains. This creates
+ the machine account in the domain (PDC) SAM. Note that you should
+ add the Samba server as a "Windows NT Workstation or Server",
+ <I
+CLASS="EMPHASIS"
+>NOT</I
+> as a Primary or backup domain controller.</P
+><P
+>Assume you have a Samba-2 server with a NetBIOS name of
+ <TT
+CLASS="CONSTANT"
+>SERV1</TT
+> and are joining an NT domain called
+ <TT
+CLASS="CONSTANT"
+>DOM</TT
+>, which has a PDC with a NetBIOS name
+ of <TT
+CLASS="CONSTANT"
+>DOMPDC</TT
+> and two backup domain controllers
+ with NetBIOS names <TT
+CLASS="CONSTANT"
+>DOMBDC1</TT
+> and <TT
+CLASS="CONSTANT"
+>DOMBDC2
+ </TT
+>.</P
+><P
+>In order to join the domain, first stop all Samba daemons
+ and run the command:</P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PROMPT"
+>root# </TT
+><TT
+CLASS="USERINPUT"
+><B
+>smbpasswd -j DOM -r DOMPDC
+ </B
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+>as we are joining the domain DOM and the PDC for that domain
+ (the only machine that has write access to the domain SAM database)
+ is DOMPDC. If this is successful you will see the message:</P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="COMPUTEROUTPUT"
+>smbpasswd: Joined domain DOM.</TT
+>
+ </P
+><P
+>in your terminal window. See the <A
+HREF="smbpasswd.8.html"
+TARGET="_top"
+> smbpasswd(8)</A
+> man page for more details.</P
+><P
+>This command goes through the machine account password
+ change protocol, then writes the new (random) machine account
+ password for this Samba server into a file in the same directory
+ in which an smbpasswd file would be stored - normally :</P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>/usr/local/samba/private</TT
+></P
+><P
+>In Samba 2.0.x, the filename looks like this:</P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+><TT
+CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
+><I
+>&lt;NT DOMAIN NAME&gt;</I
+></TT
+>.<TT
+CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
+><I
+>&lt;Samba
+ Server Name&gt;</I
+></TT
+>.mac</TT
+></P
+><P
+>The <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>.mac</TT
+> suffix stands for machine account
+ password file. So in our example above, the file would be called:</P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>DOM.SERV1.mac</TT
+></P
+><P
+>In Samba 2.2, this file has been replaced with a TDB
+ (Trivial Database) file named <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>secrets.tdb</TT
+>.
+ </P
+><P
+>This file is created and owned by root and is not
+ readable by any other user. It is the key to the domain-level
+ security for your system, and should be treated as carefully
+ as a shadow password file.</P
+><P
+>Now, before restarting the Samba daemons you must
+ edit your <A
+HREF="smb.conf.5.html"
+TARGET="_top"
+><TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>smb.conf(5)</TT
+>
+ </A
+> file to tell Samba it should now use domain security.</P
+><P
+>Change (or add) your <A
+HREF="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY"
+TARGET="_top"
+> <TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>security =</I
+></TT
+></A
+> line in the [global] section
+ of your smb.conf to read:</P
+><P
+><B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>security = domain</B
+></P
+><P
+>Next change the <A
+HREF="smb.conf.5.html#WORKGROUP"
+TARGET="_top"
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+> workgroup =</I
+></TT
+></A
+> line in the [global] section to read: </P
+><P
+><B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>workgroup = DOM</B
+></P
+><P
+>as this is the name of the domain we are joining. </P
+><P
+>You must also have the parameter <A
+HREF="smb.conf.5.html#ENCRYPTPASSWORDS"
+TARGET="_top"
+> <TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>encrypt passwords</I
+></TT
+></A
+> set to <TT
+CLASS="CONSTANT"
+>yes
+ </TT
+> in order for your users to authenticate to the NT PDC.</P
+><P
+>Finally, add (or modify) a <A
+HREF="smb.conf.5.html#PASSWORDSERVER"
+TARGET="_top"
+> <TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>password server =</I
+></TT
+></A
+> line in the [global]
+ section to read: </P
+><P
+><B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>password server = DOMPDC DOMBDC1 DOMBDC2</B
+></P
+><P
+>These are the primary and backup domain controllers Samba
+ will attempt to contact in order to authenticate users. Samba will
+ try to contact each of these servers in order, so you may want to
+ rearrange this list in order to spread out the authentication load
+ among domain controllers.</P
+><P
+>Alternatively, if you want smbd to automatically determine
+ the list of Domain controllers to use for authentication, you may
+ set this line to be :</P
+><P
+><B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>password server = *</B
+></P
+><P
+>This method, which was introduced in Samba 2.0.6,
+ allows Samba to use exactly the same mechanism that NT does. This
+ method either broadcasts or uses a WINS database in order to
+ find domain controllers to authenticate against.</P
+><P
+>Finally, restart your Samba daemons and get ready for
+ clients to begin using domain security!</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><HR><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN655"
+>Why is this better than security = server?</A
+></H1
+><P
+>Currently, domain security in Samba doesn't free you from
+ having to create local Unix users to represent the users attaching
+ to your server. This means that if domain user <TT
+CLASS="CONSTANT"
+>DOM\fred
+ </TT
+> attaches to your domain security Samba server, there needs
+ to be a local Unix user fred to represent that user in the Unix
+ filesystem. This is very similar to the older Samba security mode
+ <A
+HREF="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITYEQUALSERVER"
+TARGET="_top"
+>security = server</A
+>,
+ where Samba would pass through the authentication request to a Windows
+ NT server in the same way as a Windows 95 or Windows 98 server would.
+ </P
+><P
+>The advantage to domain-level security is that the
+ authentication in domain-level security is passed down the authenticated
+ RPC channel in exactly the same way that an NT server would do it. This
+ means Samba servers now participate in domain trust relationships in
+ exactly the same way NT servers do (i.e., you can add Samba servers into
+ a resource domain and have the authentication passed on from a resource
+ domain PDC to an account domain PDC.</P
+><P
+>In addition, with <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>security = server</B
+> every Samba
+ daemon on a server has to keep a connection open to the
+ authenticating server for as long as that daemon lasts. This can drain
+ the connection resources on a Microsoft NT server and cause it to run
+ out of available connections. With <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>security = domain</B
+>,
+ however, the Samba daemons connect to the PDC/BDC only for as long
+ as is necessary to authenticate the user, and then drop the connection,
+ thus conserving PDC connection resources.</P
+><P
+>And finally, acting in the same manner as an NT server
+ authenticating to a PDC means that as part of the authentication
+ reply, the Samba server gets the user identification information such
+ as the user SID, the list of NT groups the user belongs to, etc. All
+ this information will allow Samba to be extended in the future into
+ a mode the developers currently call appliance mode. In this mode,
+ no local Unix users will be necessary, and Samba will generate Unix
+ uids and gids from the information passed back from the PDC when a
+ user is authenticated, making a Samba server truly plug and play
+ in an NT domain environment. Watch for this code soon.</P
+><P
+><I
+CLASS="EMPHASIS"
+>NOTE:</I
+> Much of the text of this document
+ was first published in the Web magazine <A
+HREF="http://www.linuxworld.com"
+TARGET="_top"
+>
+ LinuxWorld</A
+> as the article <A
+HREF="http://www.linuxworld.com/linuxworld/lw-1998-10/lw-10-samba.html"
+TARGET="_top"
+>Doing
+ the NIS/NT Samba</A
+>.</P
+></DIV
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="CHAPTER"
+><HR><H1
+><A
+NAME="AEN669"
+>Chapter 6. Unifed Logons between Windows NT and UNIX using Winbind</A
+></H1
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN687"
+>Abstract</A
+></H1
+><P
+>Integration of UNIX and Microsoft Windows NT through
+ a unified logon has been considered a "holy grail" in heterogeneous
+ computing environments for a long time. We present <I
+CLASS="EMPHASIS"
+>winbind
+ </I
+>, a component of the Samba suite of programs as a
+ solution to the unied logon problem. Winbind uses a UNIX implementation
+ of Microsoft RPC calls, Pluggable Authentication Modules, and the Name
+ Service Switch to allow Windows NT domain users to appear and operate
+ as UNIX users on a UNIX machine. This paper describes the winbind
+ system, explaining the functionality it provides, how it is configured,
+ and how it works internally.</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><HR><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN691"
+>Introduction</A
+></H1
+><P
+>It is well known that UNIX and Microsoft Windows NT have
+ different models for representing user and group information and
+ use different technologies for implementing them. This fact has
+ made it difficult to integrate the two systems in a satisfactory
+ manner.</P
+><P
+>One common solution in use today has been to create
+ identically named user accounts on both the UNIX and Windows systems
+ and use the Samba suite of programs to provide file and print services
+ between the two. This solution is far from perfect however, as
+ adding and deleting users on both sets of machines becomes a chore
+ and two sets of passwords are required both of which which
+ can lead to synchronization problems between the UNIX and Windows
+ systems and confusion for users.</P
+><P
+>We divide the unifed logon problem for UNIX machines into
+ three smaller problems:</P
+><P
+></P
+><UL
+><LI
+><P
+>Obtaining Windows NT user and group information
+ </P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>Authenticating Windows NT users
+ </P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>Password changing for Windows NT users
+ </P
+></LI
+></UL
+><P
+>Ideally, a prospective solution to the unified logon problem
+ would satisfy all the above components without duplication of
+ information on the UNIX machines and without creating additional
+ tasks for the system administrator when maintaining users and
+ groups on either system. The winbind system provides a simple
+ and elegant solution to all three components of the unifed logon
+ problem.</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><HR><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN704"
+>What Winbind Provides</A
+></H1
+><P
+>Winbind unifies UNIX and Windows NT account management by
+ allowing a UNIX box to become a full member of a NT domain. Once
+ this is done the UNIX box will see NT users and groups as if
+ they were native UNIX users and groups, allowing the NT domain
+ to be used in much the same manner that NIS+ is used within
+ UNIX-only environments.</P
+><P
+>The end result is that whenever any
+ program on the UNIX machine asks the operating system to lookup
+ a user or group name, the query will be resolved by asking the
+ NT domain controller for the specied domain to do the lookup.
+ Because Winbind hooks into the operating system at a low level
+ (via the NSS name resolution modules in the C library) this
+ redirection to the NT domain controller is completely
+ transparent.</P
+><P
+>Users on the UNIX machine can then use NT user and group
+ names as they would use "native" UNIX names. They can chown files
+ so that they are owned by NT domain users or even login to the
+ UNIX machine and run a UNIX X-Window session as a domain user.</P
+><P
+>The only obvious indication that Winbind is being used is
+ that user and group names take the form DOMAIN\user and
+ DOMAIN\group. This is necessary as it allows Winbind to determine
+ that redirection to a domain controller is wanted for a particular
+ lookup and which trusted domain is being referenced.</P
+><P
+>Additionally, Winbind provides a authentication service
+ that hooks into the Pluggable Authentication Modules (PAM) system
+ to provide authentication via a NT domain to any PAM enabled
+ applications. This capability solves the problem of synchronizing
+ passwords between systems as all passwords are stored in a single
+ location (on the domain controller).</P
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><HR><H2
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><A
+NAME="AEN711"
+>Target Uses</A
+></H2
+><P
+>Winbind is targeted at organizations that have an
+ existing NT based domain infrastructure into which they wish
+ to put UNIX workstations or servers. Winbind will allow these
+ organizations to deploy UNIX workstations without having to
+ maintain a separate account infrastructure. This greatly simplies
+ the administrative overhead of deploying UNIX workstations into
+ a NT based organization.</P
+><P
+>Another interesting way in which we expect Winbind to
+ be used is as a central part of UNIX based appliances. Appliances
+ that provide file and print services to Microsoft based networks
+ will be able to use Winbind to provide seamless integration of
+ the appliance into the domain.</P
+></DIV
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><HR><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN715"
+>How Winbind Works</A
+></H1
+><P
+>The winbind system is designed around a client/server
+ architecture. A long running <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>winbindd</B
+> daemon
+ listens on a UNIX domain socket waiting for requests
+ to arrive. These requests are generated by the NSS and PAM
+ clients and processed sequentially.</P
+><P
+>The technologies used to implement winbind are described
+ in detail below.</P
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><HR><H2
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><A
+NAME="AEN720"
+>Microsoft Remote Procedure Calls</A
+></H2
+><P
+>Over the last two years, efforts have been underway
+ by various Samba Team members to decode various aspects of
+ the Microsoft Remote Procedure Call (MSRPC) system. This
+ system is used for most network related operations between
+ Windows NT machines including remote management, user authentication
+ and print spooling. Although initially this work was done
+ to aid the implementation of Primary Domain Controller (PDC)
+ functionality in Samba, it has also yielded a body of code which
+ can be used for other purposes.</P
+><P
+>Winbind uses various MSRPC calls to enumerate domain users
+ and groups and to obtain detailed information about individual
+ users or groups. Other MSRPC calls can be used to authenticate
+ NT domain users and to change user passwords. By directly querying
+ a Windows PDC for user and group information, winbind maps the
+ NT account information onto UNIX user and group names.</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><HR><H2
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><A
+NAME="AEN724"
+>Name Service Switch</A
+></H2
+><P
+>The Name Service Switch, or NSS, is a feature that is
+ present in many UNIX operating systems. It allows system
+ information such as hostnames, mail aliases and user information
+ to be resolved from dierent sources. For example, a standalone
+ UNIX workstation may resolve system information from a series of
+ flat files stored on the local lesystem. A networked workstation
+ may first attempt to resolve system information from local files,
+ then consult a NIS database for user information or a DNS server
+ for hostname information.</P
+><P
+>The NSS application programming interface allows winbind
+ to present itself as a source of system information when
+ resolving UNIX usernames and groups. Winbind uses this interface,
+ and information obtained from a Windows NT server using MSRPC
+ calls to provide a new source of account enumeration. Using standard
+ UNIX library calls, one can enumerate the users and groups on
+ a UNIX machine running winbind and see all users and groups in
+ a NT domain plus any trusted domain as though they were local
+ users and groups.</P
+><P
+>The primary control le for NSS is <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>/etc/nsswitch.conf
+ </TT
+>. When a UNIX application makes a request to do a lookup
+ the C library looks in <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>/etc/nsswitch.conf</TT
+>
+ for a line which matches the service type being requested, for
+ example the "passwd" service type is used when user or group names
+ are looked up. This config line species which implementations
+ of that service should be tried andin what order. If the passwd
+ config line is:</P
+><P
+><B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>passwd: files example</B
+></P
+><P
+>then the C library will first load a module called
+ <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>/lib/libnss_files.so</TT
+> followed by
+ the module <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>/lib/libnss_example.so</TT
+>. The
+ C library will dynamically load each of these modules in turn
+ and call resolver functions within the modules to try to resolve
+ the request. Once the request is resolved the C library returns the
+ result to the application.</P
+><P
+>This NSS interface provides a very easy way for Winbind
+ to hook into the operating system. All that needs to be done
+ is to put <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>libnss_winbind.so</TT
+> in <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>/lib/</TT
+>
+ then add "winbind" into <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>/etc/nsswitch.conf</TT
+> at
+ the appropriate place. The C library will then call Winbind to
+ resolve user and group names.</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><HR><H2
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><A
+NAME="AEN740"
+>Pluggable Authentication Modules</A
+></H2
+><P
+>Pluggable Authentication Modules, also known as PAM,
+ is a system for abstracting authentication and authorization
+ technologies. With a PAM module it is possible to specify different
+ authentication methods for dierent system applications without
+ having to recompile these applications. PAM is also useful
+ for implementing a particular policy for authorization. For example,
+ a system administrator may only allow console logins from users
+ stored in the local password file but only allow users resolved from
+ a NIS database to log in over the network.</P
+><P
+>Winbind uses the authentication management and password
+ management PAM interface to integrate Windows NT users into a
+ UNIX system. This allows Windows NT users to log in to a UNIX
+ machine and be authenticated against a suitable Primary Domain
+ Controller. These users can also change their passwords and have
+ this change take eect directly on the Primary Domain Controller.
+ </P
+><P
+>PAM is congured by providing control files in the directory
+ <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>/etc/pam.d/</TT
+> for each of the services that
+ require authentication. When an authentication request is made
+ by an application the PAM code in the C library looks up this
+ control file to determine what modules to load to do the
+ authentication check and in what order. This interface makes adding
+ a new authentication service for Winbind very easy, all that needs
+ to be done is that the <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>pam_winbind.so</TT
+> module
+ is copied to <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>/lib/security/</TT
+> and the pam
+ control files for relevant services are updated to allow
+ authentication via winbind. See the PAM documentation
+ for more details.</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><HR><H2
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><A
+NAME="AEN748"
+>User and Group ID Allocation</A
+></H2
+><P
+>When a user or group is created under Windows NT
+ is it allocated a numerical relative identier (RID). This is
+ slightly dierent to UNIX which has a range of numbers which are
+ used to identify users, and the same range in which to identify
+ groups. It is winbind's job to convert RIDs to UNIX id numbers and
+ vice versa. When winbind is congured it is given part of the UNIX
+ user id space and a part of the UNIX group id space in which to
+ store Windows NT users and groups. If a Windows NT user is
+ resolved for the first time, it is allocated the next UNIX id from
+ the range. The same process applies for Windows NT groups. Over
+ time, winbind will have mapped all Windows NT users and groups
+ to UNIX user ids and group ids.</P
+><P
+>The results of this mapping are stored persistently in
+ a ID mapping database held in a tdb database). This ensures that
+ RIDs are mapped to UNIX IDs in a consistent way.</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><HR><H2
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><A
+NAME="AEN752"
+>Result Caching</A
+></H2
+><P
+>An active system can generate a lot of user and group
+ name lookups. To reduce the network cost of these lookups winbind
+ uses a caching scheme based on the SAM sequence number supplied
+ by NT domain controllers. User or group information returned
+ by a PDC is cached by winbind along with a sequence number also
+ returned by the PDC. This sequence number is incremented by
+ Windows NT whenever any user or group information is modied. If
+ a cached entry has expired, the sequence number is requested from
+ the PDC and compared against the sequence number of the cached entry.
+ If the sequence numbers do not match, then the cached information
+ is discarded and up to date information is requested directly
+ from the PDC.</P
+></DIV
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><HR><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN755"
+>Installation and Configuration</A
+></H1
+><P
+>The easiest way to install winbind is by using the packages
+ provided in the <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>pub/samba/appliance/</TT
+>
+ directory on your nearest
+ Samba mirror. These packages provide snapshots of the Samba source
+ code and binaries already setup to provide the full functionality
+ of winbind. This setup is a little more complex than a normal Samba
+ build as winbind needs a small amount of functionality from a
+ development code branch called SAMBA_TNG.</P
+><P
+>Once you have installed the packages you should read
+ the <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>winbindd(8)</B
+> man page which will provide you
+ with conguration information and give you sample conguration files.
+ You may also wish to update the main Samba daemons smbd and nmbd)
+ with a more recent development release, such as the recently
+ announced Samba 2.2 alpha release.</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><HR><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN761"
+>Limitations</A
+></H1
+><P
+>Winbind has a number of limitations in its current
+ released version which we hope to overcome in future
+ releases:</P
+><P
+></P
+><UL
+><LI
+><P
+>Winbind is currently only available for
+ the Linux operating system, although ports to other operating
+ systems are certainly possible. For such ports to be feasible,
+ we require the C library of the target operating system to
+ support the Name Service Switch and Pluggable Authentication
+ Modules systems. This is becoming more common as NSS and
+ PAM gain support among UNIX vendors.</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>The mappings of Windows NT RIDs to UNIX ids
+ is not made algorithmically and depends on the order in which
+ unmapped users or groups are seen by winbind. It may be difficult
+ to recover the mappings of rid to UNIX id mapping if the file
+ containing this information is corrupted or destroyed.</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>Currently the winbind PAM module does not take
+ into account possible workstation and logon time restrictions
+ that may be been set for Windows NT users.</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>Building winbind from source is currently
+ quite tedious as it requires combining source code from two Samba
+ branches. Work is underway to solve this by providing all
+ the necessary functionality in the main Samba code branch.</P
+></LI
+></UL
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><HR><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN773"
+>Conclusion</A
+></H1
+><P
+>The winbind system, through the use of the Name Service
+ Switch, Pluggable Authentication Modules, and appropriate
+ Microsoft RPC calls have allowed us to provide seamless
+ integration of Microsoft Windows NT domain users on a
+ UNIX system. The result is a great reduction in the administrative
+ cost of running a mixed UNIX and NT network.</P
+></DIV
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="CHAPTER"
+><HR><H1
+><A
+NAME="AEN776"
+>Chapter 7. UNIX Permission Bits and WIndows NT Access Control Lists</A
+></H1
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN787"
+>Viewing and changing UNIX permissions using the NT
+ security dialogs</A
+></H1
+><P
+>New in the Samba 2.0.4 release is the ability for Windows
+ NT clients to use their native security settings dialog box to
+ view and modify the underlying UNIX permissions.</P
+><P
+>Note that this ability is careful not to compromise
+ the security of the UNIX host Samba is running on, and
+ still obeys all the file permission rules that a Samba
+ administrator can set.</P
+><P
+>In Samba 2.0.4 and above the default value of the
+ parameter <A
+HREF="smb.conf.5.html#NTACLSUPPOR"
+TARGET="_top"
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+> nt acl support</I
+></TT
+></A
+> has been changed from
+ <TT
+CLASS="CONSTANT"
+>false</TT
+> to <TT
+CLASS="CONSTANT"
+>true</TT
+>, so
+ manipulation of permissions is turned on by default.</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><HR><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN796"
+>How to view file security on a Samba share</A
+></H1
+><P
+>From an NT 4.0 client, single-click with the right
+ mouse button on any file or directory in a Samba mounted
+ drive letter or UNC path. When the menu pops-up, click
+ on the <I
+CLASS="EMPHASIS"
+>Properties</I
+> entry at the bottom of
+ the menu. This brings up the normal file properties dialog
+ box, but with Samba 2.0.4 this will have a new tab along the top
+ marked <I
+CLASS="EMPHASIS"
+>Security</I
+>. Click on this tab and you
+ will see three buttons, <I
+CLASS="EMPHASIS"
+>Permissions</I
+>,
+ <I
+CLASS="EMPHASIS"
+>Auditing</I
+>, and <I
+CLASS="EMPHASIS"
+>Ownership</I
+>.
+ The <I
+CLASS="EMPHASIS"
+>Auditing</I
+> button will cause either
+ an error message <SPAN
+CLASS="ERRORNAME"
+>A requested privilege is not held
+ by the client</SPAN
+> to appear if the user is not the
+ NT Administrator, or a dialog which is intended to allow an
+ Administrator to add auditing requirements to a file if the
+ user is logged on as the NT Administrator. This dialog is
+ non-functional with a Samba share at this time, as the only
+ useful button, the <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>Add</B
+> button will not currently
+ allow a list of users to be seen.</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><HR><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN807"
+>Viewing file ownership</A
+></H1
+><P
+>Clicking on the <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>"Ownership"</B
+> button
+ brings up a dialog box telling you who owns the given file. The
+ owner name will be of the form :</P
+><P
+><B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>"SERVER\user (Long name)"</B
+></P
+><P
+>Where <TT
+CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
+><I
+>SERVER</I
+></TT
+> is the NetBIOS name of
+ the Samba server, <TT
+CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
+><I
+>user</I
+></TT
+> is the user name of
+ the UNIX user who owns the file, and <TT
+CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
+><I
+>(Long name)</I
+></TT
+>
+ is the discriptive string identifying the user (normally found in the
+ GECOS field of the UNIX password database). Click on the <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>Close
+ </B
+> button to remove this dialog.</P
+><P
+>If the parameter <TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>nt acl support</I
+></TT
+>
+ is set to <TT
+CLASS="CONSTANT"
+>false</TT
+> then the file owner will
+ be shown as the NT user <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>"Everyone"</B
+>.</P
+><P
+>The <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>Take Ownership</B
+> button will not allow
+ you to change the ownership of this file to yourself (clicking on
+ it will display a dialog box complaining that the user you are
+ currently logged onto the NT client cannot be found). The reason
+ for this is that changing the ownership of a file is a privilaged
+ operation in UNIX, available only to the <I
+CLASS="EMPHASIS"
+>root</I
+>
+ user. As clicking on this button causes NT to attempt to change
+ the ownership of a file to the current user logged into the NT
+ client this will not work with Samba at this time.</P
+><P
+>There is an NT chown command that will work with Samba
+ and allow a user with Administrator privillage connected
+ to a Samba 2.0.4 server as root to change the ownership of
+ files on both a local NTFS filesystem or remote mounted NTFS
+ or Samba drive. This is available as part of the <I
+CLASS="EMPHASIS"
+>Seclib
+ </I
+> NT security library written by Jeremy Allison of
+ the Samba Team, available from the main Samba ftp site.</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><HR><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN827"
+>Viewing file or directory permissions</A
+></H1
+><P
+>The third button is the <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>"Permissions"</B
+>
+ button. Clicking on this brings up a dialog box that shows both
+ the permissions and the UNIX owner of the file or directory.
+ The owner is displayed in the form :</P
+><P
+><B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>"SERVER\user (Long name)"</B
+></P
+><P
+>Where <TT
+CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
+><I
+>SERVER</I
+></TT
+> is the NetBIOS name of
+ the Samba server, <TT
+CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
+><I
+>user</I
+></TT
+> is the user name of
+ the UNIX user who owns the file, and <TT
+CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
+><I
+>(Long name)</I
+></TT
+>
+ is the discriptive string identifying the user (normally found in the
+ GECOS field of the UNIX password database).</P
+><P
+>If the parameter <TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>nt acl support</I
+></TT
+>
+ is set to <TT
+CLASS="CONSTANT"
+>false</TT
+> then the file owner will
+ be shown as the NT user <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>"Everyone"</B
+> and the
+ permissions will be shown as NT "Full Control".</P
+><P
+>The permissions field is displayed differently for files
+ and directories, so I'll describe the way file permissions
+ are displayed first.</P
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><HR><H2
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><A
+NAME="AEN842"
+>File Permissions</A
+></H2
+><P
+>The standard UNIX user/group/world triple and
+ the correspinding "read", "write", "execute" permissions
+ triples are mapped by Samba into a three element NT ACL
+ with the 'r', 'w', and 'x' bits mapped into the corresponding
+ NT permissions. The UNIX world permissions are mapped into
+ the global NT group <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>Everyone</B
+>, followed
+ by the list of permissions allowed for UNIX world. The UNIX
+ owner and group permissions are displayed as an NT
+ <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>user</B
+> icon and an NT <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>local
+ group</B
+> icon respectively followed by the list
+ of permissions allowed for the UNIX user and group.</P
+><P
+>As many UNIX permission sets don't map into common
+ NT names such as <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>"read"</B
+>, <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+> "change"</B
+> or <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>"full control"</B
+> then
+ usually the permissions will be prefixed by the words <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+> "Special Access"</B
+> in the NT display list.</P
+><P
+>But what happens if the file has no permissions allowed
+ for a particular UNIX user group or world component ? In order
+ to allow "no permissions" to be seen and modified then Samba
+ overloads the NT <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>"Take Ownership"</B
+> ACL attribute
+ (which has no meaning in UNIX) and reports a component with
+ no permissions as having the NT <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>"O"</B
+> bit set.
+ This was chosen of course to make it look like a zero, meaning
+ zero permissions. More details on the decision behind this will
+ be given below.</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><HR><H2
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><A
+NAME="AEN856"
+>Directory Permissions</A
+></H2
+><P
+>Directories on an NT NTFS file system have two
+ different sets of permissions. The first set of permissions
+ is the ACL set on the directory itself, this is usually displayed
+ in the first set of parentheses in the normal <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>"RW"</B
+>
+ NT style. This first set of permissions is created by Samba in
+ exactly the same way as normal file permissions are, described
+ above, and is displayed in the same way.</P
+><P
+>The second set of directory permissions has no real meaning
+ in the UNIX permissions world and represents the <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+> "inherited"</B
+> permissions that any file created within
+ this directory would inherit.</P
+><P
+>Samba synthesises these inherited permissions for NT by
+ returning as an NT ACL the UNIX permission mode that a new file
+ created by Samba on this share would receive.</P
+></DIV
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><HR><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN863"
+>Modifying file or directory permissions</A
+></H1
+><P
+>Modifying file and directory permissions is as simple
+ as changing the displayed permissions in the dialog box, and
+ clicking the <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>OK</B
+> button. However, there are
+ limitations that a user needs to be aware of, and also interactions
+ with the standard Samba permission masks and mapping of DOS
+ attributes that need to also be taken into account.</P
+><P
+>If the parameter <TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>nt acl support</I
+></TT
+>
+ is set to <TT
+CLASS="CONSTANT"
+>false</TT
+> then any attempt to set
+ security permissions will fail with an <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>"Access Denied"
+ </B
+> message.</P
+><P
+>The first thing to note is that the <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>"Add"</B
+>
+ button will not return a list of users in Samba 2.0.4 (it will give
+ an error message of <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>"The remote proceedure call failed
+ and did not execute"</B
+>). This means that you can only
+ manipulate the current user/group/world permissions listed in
+ the dialog box. This actually works quite well as these are the
+ only permissions that UNIX actually has.</P
+><P
+>If a permission triple (either user, group, or world)
+ is removed from the list of permissions in the NT dialog box,
+ then when the <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>"OK"</B
+> button is pressed it will
+ be applied as "no permissions" on the UNIX side. If you then
+ view the permissions again the "no permissions" entry will appear
+ as the NT <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>"O"</B
+> flag, as described above. This
+ allows you to add permissions back to a file or directory once
+ you have removed them from a triple component.</P
+><P
+>As UNIX supports only the "r", "w" and "x" bits of
+ an NT ACL then if other NT security attributes such as "Delete
+ access" are selected then they will be ignored when applied on
+ the Samba server.</P
+><P
+>When setting permissions on a directory the second
+ set of permissions (in the second set of parentheses) is
+ by default applied to all files within that directory. If this
+ is not what you want you must uncheck the <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>"Replace
+ permissions on existing files"</B
+> checkbox in the NT
+ dialog before clicking <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>"OK"</B
+>.</P
+><P
+>If you wish to remove all permissions from a
+ user/group/world component then you may either highlight the
+ component and click the <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>"Remove"</B
+> button,
+ or set the component to only have the special <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>"Take
+ Ownership"</B
+> permission (dsplayed as <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>"O"
+ </B
+>) highlighted.</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><HR><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN885"
+>Interaction with the standard Samba create mask
+ parameters</A
+></H1
+><P
+>Note that with Samba 2.0.5 there are four new parameters
+ to control this interaction. These are :</P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>security mask</I
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>force security mode</I
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>directory security mask</I
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>force directory security mode</I
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+>Once a user clicks <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>"OK"</B
+> to apply the
+ permissions Samba maps the given permissions into a user/group/world
+ r/w/x triple set, and then will check the changed permissions for a
+ file against the bits set in the <A
+HREF="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITYMASK"
+TARGET="_top"
+>
+ <TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>security mask</I
+></TT
+></A
+> parameter. Any bits that
+ were changed that are not set to '1' in this parameter are left alone
+ in the file permissions.</P
+><P
+>Essentially, zero bits in the <TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>security mask</I
+></TT
+>
+ mask may be treated as a set of bits the user is <I
+CLASS="EMPHASIS"
+>not</I
+>
+ allowed to change, and one bits are those the user is allowed to change.
+ </P
+><P
+>If not set explicitly this parameter is set to the same value as
+ the <A
+HREF="smb.conf.5.html#CREATEMASK"
+TARGET="_top"
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>create mask
+ </I
+></TT
+></A
+> parameter to provide compatibility with Samba 2.0.4
+ where this permission change facility was introduced. To allow a user to
+ modify all the user/group/world permissions on a file, set this parameter
+ to 0777.</P
+><P
+>Next Samba checks the changed permissions for a file against
+ the bits set in the <A
+HREF="smb.conf.5.html#FORCESECURITYMODE"
+TARGET="_top"
+> <TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>force security mode</I
+></TT
+></A
+> parameter. Any bits
+ that were changed that correspond to bits set to '1' in this parameter
+ are forced to be set.</P
+><P
+>Essentially, bits set in the <TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>force security mode
+ </I
+></TT
+> parameter may be treated as a set of bits that, when
+ modifying security on a file, the user has always set to be 'on'.</P
+><P
+>If not set explicitly this parameter is set to the same value
+ as the <A
+HREF="smb.conf.5.html#FORCECREATEMODE"
+TARGET="_top"
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>force
+ create mode</I
+></TT
+></A
+> parameter to provide compatibility
+ with Samba 2.0.4 where the permission change facility was introduced.
+ To allow a user to modify all the user/group/world permissions on a file,
+ with no restrictions set this parameter to 000.</P
+><P
+>The <TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>security mask</I
+></TT
+> and <TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>force
+ security mode</I
+></TT
+> parameters are applied to the change
+ request in that order.</P
+><P
+>For a directory Samba will perform the same operations as
+ described above for a file except using the parameter <TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+> directory security mask</I
+></TT
+> instead of <TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>security
+ mask</I
+></TT
+>, and <TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>force directory security mode
+ </I
+></TT
+> parameter instead of <TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>force security mode
+ </I
+></TT
+>.</P
+><P
+>The <TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>directory security mask</I
+></TT
+> parameter
+ by default is set to the same value as the <TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>directory mask
+ </I
+></TT
+> parameter and the <TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>force directory security
+ mode</I
+></TT
+> parameter by default is set to the same value as
+ the <TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>force directory mode</I
+></TT
+> parameter to provide
+ compatibility with Samba 2.0.4 where the permission change facility
+ was introduced.</P
+><P
+>In this way Samba enforces the permission restrictions that
+ an administrator can set on a Samba share, whilst still allowing users
+ to modify the permission bits within that restriction.</P
+><P
+>If you want to set up a share that allows users full control
+ in modifying the permission bits on their files and directories and
+ doesn't force any particular bits to be set 'on', then set the following
+ parameters in the <A
+HREF="smb.conf.5.html"
+TARGET="_top"
+><TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>smb.conf(5)
+ </TT
+></A
+> file in that share specific section :</P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>security mask = 0777</I
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>force security mode = 0</I
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>directory security mask = 0777</I
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>force directory security mode = 0</I
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+>As described, in Samba 2.0.4 the parameters :</P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>create mask</I
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>force create mode</I
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>directory mask</I
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>force directory mode</I
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+>were used instead of the parameters discussed here.</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><HR><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN949"
+>Interaction with the standard Samba file attribute
+ mapping</A
+></H1
+><P
+>Samba maps some of the DOS attribute bits (such as "read
+ only") into the UNIX permissions of a file. This means there can
+ be a conflict between the permission bits set via the security
+ dialog and the permission bits set by the file attribute mapping.
+ </P
+><P
+>One way this can show up is if a file has no UNIX read access
+ for the owner it will show up as "read only" in the standard
+ file attributes tabbed dialog. Unfortunately this dialog is
+ the same one that contains the security info in another tab.</P
+><P
+>What this can mean is that if the owner changes the permissions
+ to allow themselves read access using the security dialog, clicks
+ <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>"OK"</B
+> to get back to the standard attributes tab
+ dialog, and then clicks <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>"OK"</B
+> on that dialog, then
+ NT will set the file permissions back to read-only (as that is what
+ the attributes still say in the dialog). This means that after setting
+ permissions and clicking <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>"OK"</B
+> to get back to the
+ attributes dialog you should always hit <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>"Cancel"</B
+>
+ rather than <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>"OK"</B
+> to ensure that your changes
+ are not overridden.</P
+></DIV
+></DIV
+></DIV
+></BODY
+></HTML
+> \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/UNIX_INSTALL.html b/docs/htmldocs/UNIX_INSTALL.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..34f4ed9283a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/htmldocs/UNIX_INSTALL.html
@@ -0,0 +1,815 @@
+<HTML
+><HEAD
+><TITLE
+>How to Install and Test SAMBA</TITLE
+><META
+NAME="GENERATOR"
+CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.57"></HEAD
+><BODY
+CLASS="ARTICLE"
+BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
+TEXT="#000000"
+LINK="#0000FF"
+VLINK="#840084"
+ALINK="#0000FF"
+><DIV
+CLASS="ARTICLE"
+><DIV
+CLASS="TITLEPAGE"
+><H1
+CLASS="TITLE"
+><A
+NAME="AEN1"
+>How to Install and Test SAMBA</A
+></H1
+><HR></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN3"
+>Step 0: Read the man pages</A
+></H1
+><P
+>The man pages distributed with SAMBA contain
+ lots of useful info that will help to get you started.
+ If you don't know how to read man pages then try
+ something like:</P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PROMPT"
+>$ </TT
+><TT
+CLASS="USERINPUT"
+><B
+>nroff -man smbd.8 | more
+ </B
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+>Other sources of information are pointed to
+ by the Samba web site,<A
+HREF="http://www.samba.org/"
+TARGET="_top"
+> http://www.samba.org</A
+></P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><HR><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN11"
+>Step 1: Building the Binaries</A
+></H1
+><P
+>To do this, first run the program <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>./configure
+ </B
+> in the source directory. This should automatically
+ configure Samba for your operating system. If you have unusual
+ needs then you may wish to run</P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PROMPT"
+>root# </TT
+><TT
+CLASS="USERINPUT"
+><B
+>./configure --help
+ </B
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+>first to see what special options you can enable.
+ Then exectuting</P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PROMPT"
+>root# </TT
+><TT
+CLASS="USERINPUT"
+><B
+>make</B
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+>will create the binaries. Once it's successfully
+ compiled you can use </P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PROMPT"
+>root# </TT
+><TT
+CLASS="USERINPUT"
+><B
+>make install</B
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+>to install the binaries and manual pages. You can
+ separately install the binaries and/or man pages using</P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PROMPT"
+>root# </TT
+><TT
+CLASS="USERINPUT"
+><B
+>make installbin
+ </B
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+>and</P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PROMPT"
+>root# </TT
+><TT
+CLASS="USERINPUT"
+><B
+>make installman
+ </B
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+>Note that if you are upgrading for a previous version
+ of Samba you might like to know that the old versions of
+ the binaries will be renamed with a ".old" extension. You
+ can go back to the previous version with</P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PROMPT"
+>root# </TT
+><TT
+CLASS="USERINPUT"
+><B
+>make revert
+ </B
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+>if you find this version a disaster!</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><HR><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN39"
+>Step 2: The all important step</A
+></H1
+><P
+>At this stage you must fetch yourself a
+ coffee or other drink you find stimulating. Getting the rest
+ of the install right can sometimes be tricky, so you will
+ probably need it.</P
+><P
+>If you have installed samba before then you can skip
+ this step.</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><HR><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN43"
+>Step 3: Create the smb configuration file.</A
+></H1
+><P
+>There are sample configuration files in the examples
+ subdirectory in the distribution. I suggest you read them
+ carefully so you can see how the options go together in
+ practice. See the man page for all the options.</P
+><P
+>The simplest useful configuration file would be
+ something like this:</P
+><P
+><PRE
+CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
+> [global]
+ workgroup = MYGROUP
+
+ [homes]
+ guest ok = no
+ read only = no
+ </PRE
+></P
+><P
+>which would allow connections by anyone with an
+ account on the server, using either their login name or
+ "homes" as the service name. (Note that I also set the
+ workgroup that Samba is part of. See BROWSING.txt for defails)</P
+><P
+>Note that <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>make install</B
+> will not install
+ a <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>smb.conf</TT
+> file. You need to create it
+ yourself. </P
+><P
+>Make sure you put the smb.conf file in the same place
+ you specified in the<TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>Makefile</TT
+> (the default is to
+ look for it in <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>/usr/local/samba/lib/</TT
+>).</P
+><P
+>For more information about security settings for the
+ [homes] share please refer to the document UNIX_SECURITY.txt.</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><HR><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN57"
+>Step 4: Test your config file with
+ <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>testparm</B
+></A
+></H1
+><P
+>It's important that you test the validity of your
+ <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>smb.conf</TT
+> file using the testparm program.
+ If testparm runs OK then it will list the loaded services. If
+ not it will give an error message.</P
+><P
+>Make sure it runs OK and that the services look
+ resonable before proceeding. </P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><HR><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN63"
+>Step 5: Starting the smbd and nmbd</A
+></H1
+><P
+>You must choose to start smbd and nmbd either
+ as daemons or from <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>inetd</B
+>. Don't try
+ to do both! Either you can put them in <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+> inetd.conf</TT
+> and have them started on demand
+ by <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>inetd</B
+>, or you can start them as
+ daemons either from the command line or in <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+> /etc/rc.local</TT
+>. See the man pages for details
+ on the command line options. Take particular care to read
+ the bit about what user you need to be in order to start
+ Samba. In many cases you must be root.</P
+><P
+>The main advantage of starting <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>smbd</B
+>
+ and <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>nmbd</B
+> as a daemon is that they will
+ respond slightly more quickly to an initial connection
+ request. This is, however, unlikely to be a problem.</P
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><HR><H2
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><A
+NAME="AEN73"
+>Step 5a: Starting from inetd.conf</A
+></H2
+><P
+>NOTE; The following will be different if
+ you use NIS or NIS+ to distributed services maps.</P
+><P
+>Look at your <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>/etc/services</TT
+>.
+ What is defined at port 139/tcp. If nothing is defined
+ then add a line like this:</P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="USERINPUT"
+><B
+>netbios-ssn 139/tcp</B
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+>similarly for 137/udp you should have an entry like:</P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="USERINPUT"
+><B
+>netbios-ns 137/udp</B
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+>Next edit your <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>/etc/inetd.conf</TT
+>
+ and add two lines something like this:</P
+><P
+><PRE
+CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
+> netbios-ssn stream tcp nowait root /usr/local/samba/bin/smbd smbd
+ netbios-ns dgram udp wait root /usr/local/samba/bin/nmbd nmbd
+ </PRE
+></P
+><P
+>The exact syntax of <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>/etc/inetd.conf</TT
+>
+ varies between unixes. Look at the other entries in inetd.conf
+ for a guide.</P
+><P
+>NOTE: Some unixes already have entries like netbios_ns
+ (note the underscore) in <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>/etc/services</TT
+>.
+ You must either edit <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>/etc/services</TT
+> or
+ <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>/etc/inetd.conf</TT
+> to make them consistant.</P
+><P
+>NOTE: On many systems you may need to use the
+ "interfaces" option in smb.conf to specify the IP address
+ and netmask of your interfaces. Run <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>ifconfig</B
+>
+ as root if you don't know what the broadcast is for your
+ net. <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>nmbd</B
+> tries to determine it at run
+ time, but fails on somunixes. See the section on "testing nmbd"
+ for a method of finding if you need to do this.</P
+><P
+>!!!WARNING!!! Many unixes only accept around 5
+ parameters on the command line in <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>inetd.conf</TT
+>.
+ This means you shouldn't use spaces between the options and
+ arguments, or you should use a script, and start the script
+ from <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>inetd</B
+>.</P
+><P
+>Restart <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>inetd</B
+>, perhaps just send
+ it a HUP. If you have installed an earlier version of <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+> nmbd</B
+> then you may need to kill nmbd as well.</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><HR><H2
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><A
+NAME="AEN102"
+>Step 5b. Alternative: starting it as a daemon</A
+></H2
+><P
+>To start the server as a daemon you should create
+ a script something like this one, perhaps calling
+ it <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>startsmb</TT
+>.</P
+><P
+><PRE
+CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
+> #!/bin/sh
+ /usr/local/samba/bin/smbd -D
+ /usr/local/samba/bin/nmbd -D
+ </PRE
+></P
+><P
+>then make it executable with <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>chmod
+ +x startsmb</B
+></P
+><P
+>You can then run <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>startsmb</B
+> by
+ hand or execute it from <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>/etc/rc.local</TT
+>
+ </P
+><P
+>To kill it send a kill signal to the processes
+ <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>nmbd</B
+> and <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>smbd</B
+>.</P
+><P
+>NOTE: If you use the SVR4 style init system then
+ you may like to look at the <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>examples/svr4-startup</TT
+>
+ script to make Samba fit into that system.</P
+></DIV
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><HR><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN118"
+>Step 6: Try listing the shares available on your
+ server</A
+></H1
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PROMPT"
+>$ </TT
+><TT
+CLASS="USERINPUT"
+><B
+>smbclient -L
+ <TT
+CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
+><I
+>yourhostname</I
+></TT
+></B
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+>Your should get back a list of shares available on
+ your server. If you don't then something is incorrectly setup.
+ Note that this method can also be used to see what shares
+ are available on other LanManager clients (such as WfWg).</P
+><P
+>If you choose user level security then you may find
+ that Samba requests a password before it will list the shares.
+ See the <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>smbclient</B
+> man page for details. (you
+ can force it to list the shares without a password by
+ adding the option -U% to the command line. This will not work
+ with non-Samba servers)</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><HR><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN127"
+>Step 7: Try connecting with the unix client</A
+></H1
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PROMPT"
+>$ </TT
+><TT
+CLASS="USERINPUT"
+><B
+>smbclient <TT
+CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
+><I
+> //yourhostname/aservice</I
+></TT
+></B
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+>Typically the <TT
+CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
+><I
+>yourhostname</I
+></TT
+>
+ would be the name of the host where you installed <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+> smbd</B
+>. The <TT
+CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
+><I
+>aservice</I
+></TT
+> is
+ any service you have defined in the <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>smb.conf</TT
+>
+ file. Try your user name if you just have a [homes] section
+ in <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>smb.conf</TT
+>.</P
+><P
+>For example if your unix host is bambi and your login
+ name is fred you would type:</P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PROMPT"
+>$ </TT
+><TT
+CLASS="USERINPUT"
+><B
+>smbclient //bambi/fred
+ </B
+></TT
+></P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><HR><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN143"
+>Step 8: Try connecting from a DOS, WfWg, Win9x, WinNT,
+ Win2k, OS/2, etc... client</A
+></H1
+><P
+>Try mounting disks. eg:</P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PROMPT"
+>C:\WINDOWS\&#62; </TT
+><TT
+CLASS="USERINPUT"
+><B
+>net use d: \\servername\service
+ </B
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+>Try printing. eg:</P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PROMPT"
+>C:\WINDOWS\&#62; </TT
+><TT
+CLASS="USERINPUT"
+><B
+>net use lpt1:
+ \\servername\spoolservice</B
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PROMPT"
+>C:\WINDOWS\&#62; </TT
+><TT
+CLASS="USERINPUT"
+><B
+>print filename
+ </B
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+>Celebrate, or send me a bug report!</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><HR><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN157"
+>What If Things Don't Work?</A
+></H1
+><P
+>If nothing works and you start to think "who wrote
+ this pile of trash" then I suggest you do step 2 again (and
+ again) till you calm down.</P
+><P
+>Then you might read the file DIAGNOSIS.txt and the
+ FAQ. If you are still stuck then try the mailing list or
+ newsgroup (look in the README for details). Samba has been
+ successfully installed at thousands of sites worldwide, so maybe
+ someone else has hit your problem and has overcome it. You could
+ also use the WWW site to scan back issues of the samba-digest.</P
+><P
+>When you fix the problem PLEASE send me some updates to the
+ documentation (or source code) so that the next person will find it
+ easier. </P
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><HR><H2
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><A
+NAME="AEN162"
+>Diagnosing Problems</A
+></H2
+><P
+>If you have instalation problems then go to
+ <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>DIAGNOSIS.txt</TT
+> to try to find the
+ problem.</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><HR><H2
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><A
+NAME="AEN166"
+>Scope IDs</A
+></H2
+><P
+>By default Samba uses a blank scope ID. This means
+ all your windows boxes must also have a blank scope ID.
+ If you really want to use a non-blank scope ID then you will
+ need to use the -i &lt;scope&gt; option to nmbd, smbd, and
+ smbclient. All your PCs will need to have the same setting for
+ this to work. I do not recommend scope IDs.</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><HR><H2
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><A
+NAME="AEN169"
+>Choosing the Protocol Level</A
+></H2
+><P
+>The SMB protocol has many dialects. Currently
+ Samba supports 5, called CORE, COREPLUS, LANMAN1,
+ LANMAN2 and NT1.</P
+><P
+>You can choose what maximum protocol to support
+ in the <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>smb.conf</TT
+> file. The default is
+ NT1 and that is the best for the vast majority of sites.</P
+><P
+>In older versions of Samba you may have found it
+ necessary to use COREPLUS. The limitations that led to
+ this have mostly been fixed. It is now less likely that you
+ will want to use less than LANMAN1. The only remaining advantage
+ of COREPLUS is that for some obscure reason WfWg preserves
+ the case of passwords in this protocol, whereas under LANMAN1,
+ LANMAN2 or NT1 it uppercases all passwords before sending them,
+ forcing you to use the "password level=" option in some cases.</P
+><P
+>The main advantage of LANMAN2 and NT1 is support for
+ long filenames with some clients (eg: smbclient, Windows NT
+ or Win95). </P
+><P
+>See the smb.conf(5) manual page for more details.</P
+><P
+>Note: To support print queue reporting you may find
+ that you have to use TCP/IP as the default protocol under
+ WfWg. For some reason if you leave Netbeui as the default
+ it may break the print queue reporting on some systems.
+ It is presumably a WfWg bug.</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><HR><H2
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><A
+NAME="AEN178"
+>Printing from UNIX to a Client PC</A
+></H2
+><P
+>To use a printer that is available via a smb-based
+ server from a unix host you will need to compile the
+ smbclient program. You then need to install the script
+ "smbprint". Read the instruction in smbprint for more details.
+ </P
+><P
+>There is also a SYSV style script that does much
+ the same thing called smbprint.sysv. It contains instructions.</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><HR><H2
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><A
+NAME="AEN182"
+>Locking</A
+></H2
+><P
+>One area which sometimes causes trouble is locking.</P
+><P
+>There are two types of locking which need to be
+ performed by a SMB server. The first is "record locking"
+ which allows a client to lock a range of bytes in a open file.
+ The second is the "deny modes" that are specified when a file
+ is open.</P
+><P
+>Samba supports "record locking" using the fcntl() unix system
+ call. This is often implemented using rpc calls to a rpc.lockd process
+ running on the system that owns the filesystem. Unfortunately many
+ rpc.lockd implementations are very buggy, particularly when made to
+ talk to versions from other vendors. It is not uncommon for the
+ rpc.lockd to crash.</P
+><P
+>There is also a problem translating the 32 bit lock
+ requests generated by PC clients to 31 bit requests supported
+ by most unixes. Unfortunately many PC applications (typically
+ OLE2 applications) use byte ranges with the top bit set
+ as semaphore sets. Samba attempts translation to support
+ these types of applications, and the translation has proved
+ to be quite successful.</P
+><P
+>Strictly a SMB server should check for locks before
+ every read and write call on a file. Unfortunately with the
+ way fcntl() works this can be slow and may overstress the
+ rpc.lockd. It is also almost always unnecessary as clients
+ are supposed to independently make locking calls before reads
+ and writes anyway if locking is important to them. By default
+ Samba only makes locking calls when explicitly asked
+ to by a client, but if you set "strict locking = yes" then it will
+ make lock checking calls on every read and write. </P
+><P
+>You can also disable by range locking completely
+ using "locking = no". This is useful for those shares that
+ don't support locking or don't need it (such as cdroms). In
+ this case Samba fakes the return codes of locking calls to
+ tell clients that everything is OK.</P
+><P
+>The second class of locking is the "deny modes". These
+ are set by an application when it opens a file to determine
+ what types of access should be allowed simultaneously with
+ its open. A client may ask for DENY_NONE, DENY_READ, DENY_WRITE
+ or DENY_ALL. There are also special compatability modes called
+ DENY_FCB and DENY_DOS.</P
+><P
+>You can disable share modes using "share modes = no".
+ This may be useful on a heavily loaded server as the share
+ modes code is very slow. See also the FAST_SHARE_MODES
+ option in the Makefile for a way to do full share modes
+ very fast using shared memory (if your OS supports it).</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><HR><H2
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><A
+NAME="AEN192"
+>Mapping Usernames</A
+></H2
+><P
+>If you have different usernames on the PCs and
+ the unix server then take a look at the "username map" option.
+ See the smb.conf man page for details.</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><HR><H2
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><A
+NAME="AEN195"
+>Other Character Sets</A
+></H2
+><P
+>If you have problems using filenames with accented
+ characters in them (like the German, French or Scandinavian
+ character sets) then I recommmend you look at the "valid chars"
+ option in smb.conf and also take a look at the validchars
+ package in the examples directory.</P
+></DIV
+></DIV
+></DIV
+></BODY
+></HTML
+> \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/lmhosts.5.html b/docs/htmldocs/lmhosts.5.html
index 4d66e95b7a0..671278c19e0 100644
--- a/docs/htmldocs/lmhosts.5.html
+++ b/docs/htmldocs/lmhosts.5.html
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ VLINK="#840084"
ALINK="#0000FF"
><H1
><A
-NAME="FINDSMB"
+NAME="LMHOSTS"
>lmhosts</A
></H1
><DIV
@@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ NAME="AEN20"
><PRE
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
>#
-#Sample Samba lmhosts file.
+# Sample Samba lmhosts file.
#
192.9.200.1 TESTPC
192.9.200.20 NTSERVER#20
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/msdfs_setup.html b/docs/htmldocs/msdfs_setup.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..97c17b9e088
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/htmldocs/msdfs_setup.html
@@ -0,0 +1,203 @@
+<HTML
+><HEAD
+><TITLE
+>Hosting a Microsoft Distributed File System tree on Samba</TITLE
+><META
+NAME="GENERATOR"
+CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.57"></HEAD
+><BODY
+CLASS="ARTICLE"
+BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
+TEXT="#000000"
+LINK="#0000FF"
+VLINK="#840084"
+ALINK="#0000FF"
+><DIV
+CLASS="ARTICLE"
+><DIV
+CLASS="TITLEPAGE"
+><H1
+CLASS="TITLE"
+><A
+NAME="AEN1"
+>Hosting a Microsoft Distributed File System tree on Samba</A
+></H1
+><HR></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN3"
+>Instructions</A
+></H1
+><P
+>The Distributed File System (or Dfs) provides a means of
+ separating the logical view of files and directories that users
+ see from the actual physical locations of these resources on the
+ network. It allows for higher availability, smoother storage expansion,
+ load balancing etc. For more information about Dfs, refer to <A
+HREF="http://www.microsoft.com/NTServer/nts/downloads/winfeatures/NTSDistrFile/AdminGuide.asp"
+TARGET="_top"
+> Microsoft documentation</A
+>. </P
+><P
+>This document explains how to host a Dfs tree on a Unix
+ machine (for Dfs-aware clients to browse) using Samba.</P
+><P
+>A Samba server can be made a Dfs server by setting the global
+ boolean <A
+HREF="smb.conf.5.html#HOSTMSDFS"
+TARGET="_top"
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+> host msdfs</I
+></TT
+></A
+> parameter in the <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>smb.conf
+ </TT
+> file. You designate a share as a Dfs root using the share
+ level boolean <A
+HREF="smb.conf.5.html#MSDFSROOT"
+TARGET="_top"
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+> msdfs root</I
+></TT
+></A
+> parameter. A Dfs root directory on
+ Samba hosts Dfs links in the form of symbolic links that point
+ to other servers. For example, a symbolic link
+ <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>junction-&gt;msdfs:storage1&bsol;share1</TT
+> in
+ the share directory acts as the Dfs junction. When Dfs-aware
+ clients attempt to access the junction link, they are redirected
+ to the storage location (in this case, \\storage1\share1).</P
+><P
+>Dfs trees on Samba work with all Dfs-aware clients ranging
+ from Windows 95 to 2000.</P
+><P
+>Here's an example of setting up a Dfs tree on a Samba
+ server.</P
+><P
+><PRE
+CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
+># The smb.conf file:
+[global]
+ netbios name = SAMBA
+ host msdfs = yes
+
+[dfs]
+ path = /export/dfsroot
+ msdfs root = yes
+ </PRE
+></P
+><P
+>In the /export/dfsroot directory we set up our dfs links to
+ other servers on the network.</P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PROMPT"
+>root# </TT
+><TT
+CLASS="USERINPUT"
+><B
+>cd /export/dfsroot</B
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PROMPT"
+>root# </TT
+><TT
+CLASS="USERINPUT"
+><B
+>chown root /export/dfsroot</B
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PROMPT"
+>root# </TT
+><TT
+CLASS="USERINPUT"
+><B
+>chmod 755 /export/dfsroot</B
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PROMPT"
+>root# </TT
+><TT
+CLASS="USERINPUT"
+><B
+>ln -s msdfs:storageA\\shareA linka</B
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PROMPT"
+>root# </TT
+><TT
+CLASS="USERINPUT"
+><B
+>ln -s msdfs:serverB\\share,serverC\\share linkb</B
+></TT
+></P
+><P
+>You should set up the permissions and ownership of
+ the directory acting as the Dfs root such that only designated
+ users can create, delete or modify the msdfs links. Also note
+ that symlink names should be all lowercase. This limitation exists
+ to have Samba avoid trying all the case combinations to get at
+ the link name. Finally set up the symbolic links to point to the
+ network shares you want, and start Samba.</P
+><P
+>Users on Dfs-aware clients can now browse the Dfs tree
+ on the Samba server at \\samba\dfs. Accessing
+ links linka or linkb (which appear as directories to the client)
+ takes users directly to the appropriate shares on the network.</P
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><HR><H2
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><A
+NAME="AEN37"
+>Notes</A
+></H2
+><P
+></P
+><UL
+><LI
+><P
+>Windows clients need to be rebooted
+ if a previously mounted non-dfs share is made a dfs
+ root or vice versa. A better way is to introduce a
+ new share and make it the dfs root.</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>Currently there's a restriction that msdfs
+ symlink names should all be lowercase.</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>For security purposes, the directory
+ acting as the root of the Dfs tree should have ownership
+ and permissions set so that only designated users can
+ modify the symbolic links in the directory.</P
+></LI
+></UL
+></DIV
+></DIV
+></DIV
+></BODY
+></HTML
+> \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/printer_driver2.html b/docs/htmldocs/printer_driver2.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..543b765870b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/htmldocs/printer_driver2.html
@@ -0,0 +1,672 @@
+<HTML
+><HEAD
+><TITLE
+>Printing Support in Samba 2.2.x</TITLE
+><META
+NAME="GENERATOR"
+CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.57"></HEAD
+><BODY
+CLASS="ARTICLE"
+BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
+TEXT="#000000"
+LINK="#0000FF"
+VLINK="#840084"
+ALINK="#0000FF"
+><DIV
+CLASS="ARTICLE"
+><DIV
+CLASS="TITLEPAGE"
+><H1
+CLASS="TITLE"
+><A
+NAME="AEN1"
+>Printing Support in Samba 2.2.x</A
+></H1
+><HR></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN3"
+>Introduction</A
+></H1
+><P
+>Beginning with the 2.2.0 release, Samba now supports
+ the native Windows NT printing mechanisms implemented via
+ MS-RPC (i.e. the SPOOLSS named pipe). Previous versions of
+ Samba only supported the LanMan printing calls.</P
+><P
+>The additional functionality provided by the new
+ SPOOLSS support includes:</P
+><P
+></P
+><UL
+><LI
+><P
+>Support for downloading printer driver
+ files to Windows 95/98/NT/2000 clients upon demand.
+ </P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>Uploading of printer drivers via the
+ Windows NT Add Printer Wizard (APW) or the <A
+HREF="http://imprints.sourceforge.net"
+TARGET="_top"
+>Imprints tool set
+ </A
+></P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>Support for the native MS-RPC printing
+ calls such as StartDocPrinter, EnumJobs(), etc... (See
+ the <A
+HREF="http://msdn.microsoft.com/"
+TARGET="_top"
+>MSDN documentation
+ </A
+> for more information on the Win32 printing API)
+ </P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>Support for NT Access Control Lists (ACL)
+ on printer objects</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>Improved support for printer queue manipulation
+ through the use of an internal database for spooled job
+ information</P
+></LI
+></UL
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><HR><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN20"
+>Configuration</A
+></H1
+><P
+>In order to support the uploading of printer driver
+ files, you must first configure a file share named [print$].
+ The name of this share is hard coded in Samba's internals so
+ the name is very important (print$ is the service used by
+ Windows NT print servers to provide support for printer driver
+ download.</P
+><DIV
+CLASS="WARNING"
+><P
+></P
+><TABLE
+CLASS="WARNING"
+BORDER="1"
+WIDTH="100%"
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="CENTER"
+><B
+>Warning</B
+></TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+><P
+>Previous versions of Samba recommended using
+ a share named [printer$]. This name was taken from the
+ printer$ service created by Windows 9x clients when a
+ printer was shared. Windows 9x printer servers always have
+ a printer$ service which provides read-only access via no
+ password in order to support printer driver downloads.</P
+><P
+>However, the initial implementation allowed for a
+ parameter named <TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>printer driver location</I
+></TT
+>
+ to be used on a per share basis to specify the location of
+ the driver files associated with that printer. Another
+ parameter named <TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>printer driver</I
+></TT
+> provided
+ a means of defining the printer driver name to be sent to
+ the client.</P
+><P
+>These parameters, including <TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>printer driver
+ file</I
+></TT
+> parameter, are being depreciated and should not
+ be used in new installations. For more information on this change,
+ you should refer to the <A
+HREF="#MIGRATION"
+>Migration section
+ </A
+>of this document.</P
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+><P
+>You should modify the server's smb.conf file to create the
+ following file share (of course, some of the parameter values,
+ such as 'path' are arbitrary and should be replaced with
+ appropriate values for your site):</P
+><P
+><PRE
+CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
+>[print$]
+ path = /usr/local/samba/printers
+ guest ok = yes
+ browseable = yes
+ read only = yes
+ write list = ntadmin
+ </PRE
+></P
+><P
+>The <A
+HREF="smb./conf.5.html#WRITELIST"
+TARGET="_top"
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+> write list</I
+></TT
+></A
+> is used to allow administrative
+ level user accounts to have write access in order to update files
+ on the share. See the <A
+HREF="smb./conf.5.html"
+TARGET="_top"
+> smb.conf(5) man page</A
+> for more information on
+ configuring file shares.</P
+><P
+>The requirement for <A
+HREF="smb.conf.5.html#GUESTOK"
+TARGET="_top"
+><B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+> guest ok = yes</B
+></A
+> depends upon how your
+ site is configured. If users will be guaranteed to have
+ an account on the Samba host, then this is a non-issue.</P
+><P
+><I
+CLASS="EMPHASIS"
+>author's note: </I
+>The non-issue is that
+ if all your Windows NT users are guarenteed to be authenticated
+ by the Samba server (such as a domain member server and the NT
+ user has already been validated by the Domain Controller in
+ order to logon to the Windows NT console), then guest access
+ is not necessary. Of course, in a workgroup environment where
+ you just want to be able to print without worrying about
+ silly accounts and security, then configure the share for
+ guest access. You'll probably want to add <A
+HREF="smb.conf.5.html#MAPTOGUEST"
+TARGET="_top"
+><B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>map to guest = Bad User
+ </B
+></A
+> in the [global] section as well. Make sure
+ you understand what this parameter does before using it
+ though. --jerry]</P
+><P
+>In order for a Windows NT print server to support
+ the downloading of driver files by multiple client architectures,
+ it must create subdirectories within the [print$] service
+ which correspond to each of the supported client architectures.
+ Samba follows this model as well.</P
+><P
+>Next create the directory tree below the [print$] share
+ for each architecture you wish to support.</P
+><P
+><PRE
+CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
+> [print$]-----
+ |-W32X86 ; "Windows NT x86"
+ |-WIN40 ; "Windows 95/98"
+ |-W32ALPHA ; "Windows NT Alpha_AXP"
+ |-W32MIPS ; "Windows NT R4000"
+ |-W32PPC ; "Windows NT PowerPC"
+ </PRE
+></P
+><DIV
+CLASS="WARNING"
+><P
+></P
+><TABLE
+CLASS="WARNING"
+BORDER="1"
+WIDTH="100%"
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="CENTER"
+><B
+>Warning</B
+></TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+><P
+><I
+CLASS="EMPHASIS"
+>ATTENTION! REQUIRED PERMISSIONS</I
+></P
+><P
+>In order to currently add a new driver to you Samba host,
+ one of two conditions must hold true:</P
+><P
+></P
+><UL
+><LI
+><P
+>The account used to connect to the Samba host
+ must have a uid of 0 (i.e. a root account)</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>The account used to connect to the Samba host
+ must be a member of the <A
+HREF="smb.conf.5.html"
+TARGET="_top"
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+> printer admin</I
+></TT
+></A
+> list.</P
+></LI
+></UL
+><P
+>Of course, the connected account must still possess access
+ to add files to the sibdirectories beneath [print$].</P
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+><P
+>Once you have created the required [print$] service and
+ associated subdirectories, simply log onto the Samba server using
+ a root (or <TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>printer admin</I
+></TT
+>) account
+ from a Windows NT 4.0 client. Navigate to the "Printers" folder
+ on the Samba server. You should see an initial listing of printers
+ that matches the printer shares defined on your Samba host.</P
+><P
+>It is possible on a Windows NT print server to have printers
+ listed in the Printers folder which are not shared. Samba does
+ not make this distinction. By definition, the only printers of
+ which Samba is aware are those which are specified as shares in
+ <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>smb.conf</TT
+>.</P
+><P
+>Another interesting side note is that Windows NT clients do
+ not use the SMB printer share, but rather can print directly
+ to any printer on another Windows NT host using MS-RPC. This
+ of course assumes that the printing client has the necessary
+ privileges on the remote host serving the printer. The default
+ permissions assigned by Windows NT to a printer gives the "Print"
+ permissions to the "Everyone" well-known group.</P
+><P
+>The initial listing of printers in the Samba host's
+ Printers folder will have no printer driver assigned to them.
+ The way assign a driver to a printer is to view the Properties
+ of the printer and either</P
+><P
+></P
+><UL
+><LI
+><P
+>Use the "New Driver..." button to install
+ a new printer driver, or</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>Select a driver from the popup list of
+ installed drivers. Initially this list will be empty.</P
+></LI
+></UL
+><P
+>If you wish to install printer drivers for client
+ operating systems other than "Windows NT x86", you will need
+ to use the "Sharing" tab of the printer properties dialog.</P
+><P
+>Assuming you have connected with a root account, you
+ will also be able modify other printer properties such as
+ ACLs and device settings using this dialog box.</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><HR><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN74"
+>The Imprints Toolset</A
+></H1
+><P
+>The Imprints tool set provides a UNIX equivalent of the
+ Windows NT Add Printer Wizard. For complete information, please
+ refer to the Imprints web site at <A
+HREF="http://imprints.sourceforge.net/"
+TARGET="_top"
+> http://imprints.sourceforge.net/</A
+> as well as the documentation
+ included with the imprints source distribution. This section will
+ only provide a brief introduction to the features of Imprints.</P
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><HR><H2
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><A
+NAME="AEN78"
+>What is Imprints?</A
+></H2
+><P
+>Imprints is a collection of tools for supporting the goals
+ of</P
+><P
+></P
+><UL
+><LI
+><P
+>Providing a central repository information
+ regarding Windows NT and 95/98 printer driver packages</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>Providing the tools necessary for creating
+ the Imprints printer driver packages.</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>Providing an installation client which
+ will obtain and install printer drivers on remote Samba
+ and Windows NT 4 print servers.</P
+></LI
+></UL
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><HR><H2
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><A
+NAME="AEN88"
+>Creating Printer Driver Packages</A
+></H2
+><P
+>The process of creating printer driver packages is beyond
+ the scope of this document (refer to Imprints.txt also included
+ with the Samba distribution for more information). In short,
+ an Imprints driver package is a gzipped tarball containing the
+ driver files, related INF files, and a control file needed by the
+ installation client.</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><HR><H2
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><A
+NAME="AEN91"
+>The Imprints server</A
+></H2
+><P
+>The Imprints server is really a database server that
+ may be queried via standard HTTP mechanisms. Each printer
+ entry in the database has an associated URL for the actual
+ downloading of the package. Each package is digitally signed
+ via GnuPG which can be used to verify that package downloaded
+ is actually the one referred in the Imprints database. It is
+ <I
+CLASS="EMPHASIS"
+>not</I
+> recommended that this security check
+ be disabled.</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><HR><H2
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><A
+NAME="AEN95"
+>The Installation Client</A
+></H2
+><P
+>More information regarding the Imprints installation client
+ is available in the <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>Imprints-Client-HOWTO.ps</TT
+>
+ file included with the imprints source package.</P
+><P
+>The Imprints installation client comes in two forms.</P
+><P
+></P
+><UL
+><LI
+><P
+>a set of command line Perl scripts</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>a GTK+ based graphical interface to
+ the command line perl scripts</P
+></LI
+></UL
+><P
+>The installation client (in both forms) provides a means
+ of querying the Imprints database server for a matching
+ list of known printer model names as well as a means to
+ download and install the drivers on remote Samba and Windows
+ NT print servers.</P
+><P
+>The basic installation process is in four steps and
+ perl code is wrapped around <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>smbclient</B
+>
+ and <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>rpcclient</B
+>.</P
+><P
+><PRE
+CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
+>
+ foreach (supported architecture for a given driver)
+ {
+ 1. rpcclient: Get the appropriate upload directory
+ on the remote server
+ 2. smbclient: Upload the driver files
+ 3. rpcclient: Issues an AddPrinterDriver() MS-RPC
+ }
+
+ 4. rpcclient: Issue an AddPrinterEx() MS-RPC to actually
+ create the printer
+ </PRE
+></P
+><P
+>One of the problems encountered when implementing
+ the Imprints tool set was the name space issues between
+ various supported client architectures. For example, Windows
+ NT includes a driver named "Apple LaserWriter II NTX v51.8"
+ and Windows 95 callsits version of this driver "Apple
+ LaserWriter II NTX"</P
+><P
+>The problem is how to know what client drivers have
+ been uploaded for a printer. As astute reader will remember
+ that the Windows NT Printer Properties dialog only includes
+ space for one printer driver name. A quick look in the
+ Windows NT 4.0 system registry at</P
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>HKLM\System\CurrentControlSet\Control\Print\Environment
+ </TT
+></P
+><P
+>will reveal that Windows NT always uses the NT driver
+ name. The is ok as Windows NT always requires that at least
+ the Windows NT version of the printer driver is present.
+ However, Samba does not have the requirement internally.
+ Therefore, how can you use the NT driver name if is has not
+ already been installed?</P
+><P
+>The way of sidestepping this limitation is to require
+ that all Imprints printer driver packages include both the Intel
+ Windows NT and 95/98 printer drivers and that NT driver is
+ installed first.</P
+></DIV
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><HR><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN117"
+><A
+NAME="MIGRATION"
+></A
+>Migration to from Samba 2.0.x to
+ 2.2.x</A
+></H1
+><P
+>Given that printer driver management has changed
+ (we hope improved :) ) in 2.2.0 over prior releases,
+ migration from an existing setup to 2.2.0 can follow
+ several paths.</P
+><DIV
+CLASS="WARNING"
+><P
+></P
+><TABLE
+CLASS="WARNING"
+BORDER="1"
+WIDTH="100%"
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="CENTER"
+><B
+>Warning</B
+></TD
+></TR
+><TR
+><TD
+ALIGN="LEFT"
+><P
+>The following smb.conf parameters are considered to be
+ depreciated and will be removed soon. Do not use them
+ in new installations</P
+><P
+></P
+><UL
+><LI
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>printer driver file (G)</I
+></TT
+>
+ </P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>printer driver (S)</I
+></TT
+>
+ </P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>printer driver location (S)</I
+></TT
+>
+ </P
+></LI
+></UL
+></TD
+></TR
+></TABLE
+></DIV
+><P
+>Here are the possible scenarios for supporting migration:</P
+><P
+></P
+><UL
+><LI
+><P
+>If you does not desire the new Windows NT
+ print driver support, nothing needs to be done.
+ All existing parameters work the same.</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>If you want to take advantage of NT printer
+ driver support but does not want to migrate the
+ 9x drivers to the new setup, the leave the existing
+ printers.def file. When smbd attempts to locate a
+ 9x driver for the printer in the TDB and fails it
+ will drop down to using the printers.def (and all
+ associated parameters). The <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>make_printerdef</B
+>
+ tool will also remain for backwards compatibility but will
+ be moved to the "this tool is the old way of doing it"
+ pile.</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>If you install a Windows 9x driver for a printer
+ on your Samba host (in the printing TDB), this information will
+ take precedence and the three old printing parameters
+ will be ignored (including print driver location).</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>If you want to migrate an existing <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+> printers.def</TT
+> file into the new setup, the current only
+ solution is to use the Windows NT APW to install the NT drivers
+ and the 9x drivers. (comment: this could possibly be scripted
+ using smbclient and rpcclient, but I haven't had time --jerry)
+ </P
+></LI
+></UL
+></DIV
+></DIV
+></BODY
+></HTML
+> \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/rpcclient.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/rpcclient.1.html
index 95324065c24..647a0c267c7 100644
--- a/docs/htmldocs/rpcclient.1.html
+++ b/docs/htmldocs/rpcclient.1.html
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ NAME="AEN5"
></A
><H2
>Name</H2
->rpcclient&nbsp;--&nbsp;developer's tool to testing client side
+>rpcclient&nbsp;--&nbsp;tool for executing client side
MS-RPC functions</DIV
><DIV
CLASS="REFSYNOPSISDIV"
@@ -36,13 +36,13 @@ NAME="AEN8"
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
->nmblookup</B
-> [-d debuglevel] [-S server] [-U username] [-W workgroup] [-n &lt;netbios name&gt;] [-A authfile] [-N] [-l logfile] [-I destinationIP] [-E &lt;terminal code&gt;] [-c &lt;command string&gt;] [-i scope] [-O &lt;socket options&gt;] [-s &lt;smb config file&gt;]</P
+>rpcclient</B
+> {server} [-A authfile] [-c &lt;command string&gt;] [-d debuglevel] [-h] [-l logfile] [-N] [-s &lt;smb config file&gt;] [-U username[%password]] [-W workgroup] [-N]</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="REFSECT1"
><A
-NAME="AEN25"
+NAME="AEN22"
></A
><H2
>DESCRIPTION</H2
@@ -56,16 +56,16 @@ TARGET="_top"
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>rpcclient</B
-> is a utility for developers for
- executing various MS-RPC functions. It's primary use is for testing
- Samba's own MS-RPC server implementation, however many administrators
- have written scripts around it to manage Windows NT clients from
+> is a utility initially developed
+ to test MS-RPC functionality in Samba itself. It has undergone
+ several stages of development and stability. Many system administrators
+ have now written scripts around it to manage Windows NT clients from
their UNIX workstation. </P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="REFSECT1"
><A
-NAME="AEN31"
+NAME="AEN28"
></A
><H2
>OPTIONS</H2
@@ -75,105 +75,126 @@ NAME="AEN31"
CLASS="VARIABLELIST"
><DL
><DT
->-d debuglevel</DT
-><DD
-><P
->set the debuglevel. Debug level 0 is the lowest
- and 100 being the highest. This should be set to 100 if you are
- planning on submitting a bug report to the Samba team
- (see BUGS.txt). </P
-></DD
-><DT
->-S server</DT
+>server</DT
><DD
><P
->NetBIOS name of Server to which you wish to
- connect. The server can be any SMB/CIFS server. The name is
- resolved using either the <TT
+>NetBIOS name of Server to which to connect.
+ The server can be any SMB/CIFS server. The name is
+ resolved using the <A
+HREF="smb.conf.5.html#NAMERESOLVEORDER"
+TARGET="_top"
+> <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>name resolve order</I
></TT
->
- line or by using the -R option. </P
+></A
+> line from
+ <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>smb.conf(5)</TT
+>.</P
></DD
><DT
->-l logbasename</DT
+>-A filename</DT
><DD
><P
->File name for log/debug files. .client will be
- appended. The log file is never removed by the client.
+>This option allows
+ you to specify a file from which to read the username and
+ password used in the connection. The format of the file is
</P
+><P
+><PRE
+CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
+> username = &lt;value&gt;
+ password = &lt;value&gt;
+ domain = &lt;value&gt;
+ </PRE
+></P
+><P
+>Make certain that the permissions on the file restrict
+ access from unwanted users. </P
></DD
><DT
->-n netbios name</DT
+>-c 'command string'</DT
><DD
><P
->NetBIOS name of the
- local machine. This option is only needed if your Samba client
- cannot find it automatically. Samba should use the uppercase
- of the machine's hostname. </P
+>execute semicolon separated commands (listed
+ below)) </P
></DD
><DT
->-N</DT
+>-d debuglevel</DT
><DD
><P
->tells rpcclient not to ask for a password.
- <B
-CLASS="COMMAND"
->rpcclient</B
-> will prompt the user by default.
+>set the debuglevel. Debug level 0 is the lowest
+ and 100 being the highest. This should be set to 100 if you are
+ planning on submitting a bug report to the Samba team (see BUGS.txt).
</P
></DD
><DT
->-I destinationIP</DT
+>-h</DT
><DD
><P
->The IP address of the server specified with
- the -S option. Only needed when the server's NetBIOS name cannot
- be resolved using WINS or broadcast and isn't found in the LMHOSTS
- file. </P
+>Print a summary of command line options.
+ </P
></DD
><DT
->-E</DT
+>-l logbasename</DT
><DD
><P
->causes <B
-CLASS="COMMAND"
->rpcclient</B
-> to write
- messages to stderr instead of stdout. </P
+>File name for log/debug files. .client will be
+ appended. The log file is never removed by the client.
+ </P
></DD
><DT
->-U username[%pass]</DT
+>-N</DT
><DD
><P
->Sets the SMB username or username and password.
- If %pass is not specified, The user will be prompted. The client
- will first check the USER environment variable, then the
- <TT
+>instruct <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>rpcclient</B
+> not to ask
+ for a password. By default, <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>rpcclient</B
+> will prompt
+ for a password. See also the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
->$LOGNAME</I
+>-U</I
></TT
+> option.</P
+></DD
+><DT
+>-s smb.conf</DT
+><DD
+><P
+>Specifies the location of the all important
+ <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>smb.conf</TT
+> file. </P
+></DD
+><DT
+>-U username[%password]</DT
+><DD
+><P
+>Sets the SMB username or username and password. </P
+><P
+>If %password is not specified, The user will be prompted. The
+ client will first check the <TT
+CLASS="ENVAR"
+>USER</TT
+> environment variable, then the
+ <TT
+CLASS="ENVAR"
+>LOGNAME</TT
> variable and if either exist, the
- string is uppercased. Anything in these variables following a '%'
- sign will be treated as the password. If these environmental
- variables are not found, the username <TT
+ string is uppercased. If these environmental variables are not
+ found, the username <TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>GUEST</TT
->
- is used. </P
-><P
->If the password is not included in these environment
- variables (using the %pass syntax), rpcclient will look for
- a <TT
-CLASS="PARAMETER"
-><I
->$PASSWD</I
-></TT
-> environment variable from which
- to read the password. </P
+> is used. </P
><P
>A third option is to use a credentials file which
contains the plaintext of the username and password. This
@@ -188,18 +209,12 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
></TT
> for more details. </P
><P
->Be cautious about including passwords in scripts or in
- the <TT
-CLASS="PARAMETER"
-><I
->$PASSWD</I
-></TT
-> environment variable. Also, on
+>Be cautious about including passwords in scripts. Also, on
many systems the command line of a running process may be seen
via the <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>ps</B
-> command to be safe always allow
+> command. To be safe always allow
<B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>rpcclient</B
@@ -207,25 +222,6 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
it in directly. </P
></DD
><DT
->-A filename</DT
-><DD
-><P
->This option allows
- you to specify a file from which to read the username and
- password used in the connection. The format of the file is
- </P
-><P
-><PRE
-CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
->username = &lt;value&gt;
-password = &lt;value&gt;
- </PRE
-></P
-><P
->Make certain that the permissions on the file restrict
- access from unwanted users. </P
-></DD
-><DT
>-W domain</DT
><DD
><P
@@ -241,82 +237,20 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
it causes the client to log on using the server's local SAM (as
opposed to the Domain SAM). </P
></DD
-><DT
->-P</DT
-><DD
-><P
->operate in promptless mode. Without this
- mode (the default) <B
-CLASS="COMMAND"
->rpcclient</B
-> displays a
- prompt of the form '[domain\username@host]$' </P
-></DD
-><DT
->-c 'command string'</DT
-><DD
-><P
->execute semicolon separated commands (listed
- below)) </P
-></DD
-><DT
->-t terminalcode</DT
-><DD
-><P
->This tells the Samba client how to interpret
- the incoming filenames, in regards to character sets. The list
- here is not complete. For a complete list see your local Samba
- source. Some valid options are sjis, euc, jis7, jis8, junet
- and hex. </P
-></DD
-><DT
->-O socket options</DT
-><DD
-><P
->These socket options are the same as in
- <TT
-CLASS="FILENAME"
->smb.conf</TT
-> (under the <TT
-CLASS="PARAMETER"
-><I
->socket options
- </I
-></TT
-> section). </P
-></DD
-><DT
->-s smb.conf</DT
-><DD
-><P
->Specifies the location of the all important
- <TT
-CLASS="FILENAME"
->smb.conf</TT
-> file. </P
-></DD
-><DT
->-i scope</DT
-><DD
-><P
->Defines the NetBIOS scope. For more
- information on NetBIOS scopes, see rfc1001 and rfc1002. NetBIOS
- scopes are rarely used. </P
-></DD
></DL
></DIV
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="REFSECT1"
><A
-NAME="AEN119"
+NAME="AEN91"
></A
><H2
>COMMANDS</H2
><P
><I
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
->SPOOLSS Commands</I
+>LSARPC</I
></P
><P
></P
@@ -325,116 +259,94 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS"
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
->spoolenum</B
-> - Execute an EnumPrinters()
- call. This lists the various installed and share printers. Refer
- to the MS Platform SDK documentation for more details of the various
- flags and calling options. </P
+>lsaquery</B
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
->spoolenumports level
- </B
-> - Executes an EnumPorts() call using the specified
- info level. Currently only info level 1 and 2 are supported.
- </P
+>lookupsids</B
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
->spoolenumdata</B
-> - Enumerate all
- printer setting data stored on the server. On Windows NT clients,
- these values are stored in the registry, while Samba servers
- store them in the printers TDB. This command corresponds
- to the MS Platform SDK GetPrinterData() function. </P
+>lookupnames</B
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
->spooljobs printer</B
-> - List the jobs
- and status of a given printer.
- This command corresponds to the MS Platform SDK EnumJobs()
- function. </P
+>enumtrusts</B
+></P
></LI
+></UL
+><P
+> </P
+><P
+><I
+CLASS="EMPHASIS"
+>SAMR</I
+></P
+><P
+></P
+><UL
><LI
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
->spoolopen printer
- </B
-> - Execute an OpenPrinterEx() and ClosePrinter() RPC
- against a given printer. </P
+>queryuser</B
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
->spoolgetdata printer
- </B
-> - Retrieve the data for a given printer setting. See
- the <B
-CLASS="COMMAND"
->spoolenumdata</B
-> command for more information.
- This command corresponds to the GetPrinterData() MS Platform
- SDK function. </P
+>querygroup</B
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
->spoolgetprinter printer
- </B
-> - Retrieve the current printer information. This command
- corresponds to the GetPrinter() MS Platform SDK function.
- </P
+>queryusergroups</B
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
->spoolgetprinterdriver
- printer</B
-> - Retrieve the printer driver information
- (such as driver file, config file, dependent files, etc...) for
- the given printer. This command corresponds to the GetPrinterDriver()
- MS Platform SDK function. </P
+>querygroupmem</B
+></P
></LI
-><LI
+></UL
+><P
+> </P
><P
-><B
-CLASS="COMMAND"
->spoolgetprinterdriverdir
- arch</B
-> - Execute a GetPrinterDriverDirectory()
- RPC to retreive the SMB share name and subdirectory for
- storing printer driver files for a given architecture. Possible
- values for <TT
-CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
->arch</I
-></TT
-> are "Windows 4.0"
- (for Windows 95/98), "Windows NT x86", "Windows NT PowerPC", "Windows
- Alpha_AXP", and "Windows NT R4000". </P
-></LI
+CLASS="EMPHASIS"
+>SPOOLSS</I
+></P
+><P
+></P
+><UL
><LI
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
->spooladdprinterdriver
- arch config</B
-> - Execute an
- AddPrinterDriver() RPC to install the printer driver information
- on the server. Note that the driver files should already exist
- in the directory returned by spoolgetprinterdriverdir. Possible
- values for <TT
+>adddriver &lt;arch&gt; &lt;config&gt;</B
+>
+ - Execute an AddPrinterDriver() RPC to install the printer driver
+ information on the server. Note that the driver files should
+ already exist in the directory returned by
+ <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>getdriverdir</B
+>. Possible values for
+ <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>arch</I
@@ -442,7 +354,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
> are the same as those for
the <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
->spooolgetprintedriverdir</B
+>getdriverdir</B
> command.
The <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
@@ -454,14 +366,14 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><P
><PRE
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
->Long Printer Name:\
-Driver File Name:\
-Data File Name:\
-Config File Name:\
-Help File Name:\
-Language Monitor Name:\
-Default Data Type:\
-Comma Separated list of Files
+> Long Printer Name:\
+ Driver File Name:\
+ Data File Name:\
+ Config File Name:\
+ Help File Name:\
+ Language Monitor Name:\
+ Default Data Type:\
+ Comma Separated list of Files
</PRE
></P
><P
@@ -478,57 +390,165 @@ Comma Separated list of Files
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
->spooladdprinter printername
- sharename drivername port
- </B
-> - Add a printer on the remote server. This printer
+>addprinter &lt;printername&gt;
+ &lt;sharename&gt; &lt;drivername&gt; &lt;port&gt;</B
+>
+ - Add a printer on the remote server. This printer
will be automatically shared. Be aware that the printer driver
- must already be installed on the server (see addprinterdriver)
+ must already be installed on the server (see <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>adddriver</B
+>)
and the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>port</I
></TT
->must be a valid port name. </P
+>must be a valid port name (see
+ <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>enumports</B
+>.</P
></LI
-></UL
+><LI
><P
-><I
-CLASS="EMPHASIS"
->General Commands</I
-></P
+><B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>enumdata</B
+> - Enumerate all
+ printer setting data stored on the server. On Windows NT clients,
+ these values are stored in the registry, while Samba servers
+ store them in the printers TDB. This command corresponds
+ to the MS Platform SDK GetPrinterData() function (* This
+ command is currently unimplemented).</P
+></LI
+><LI
><P
-></P
-><UL
+><B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>enumjobs &lt;printer&gt;</B
+>
+ - List the jobs and status of a given printer.
+ This command corresponds to the MS Platform SDK EnumJobs()
+ function (* This command is currently unimplemented).</P
+></LI
><LI
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
->set</B
-> - Set miscellaneous
- <B
+>enumports [level]</B
+>
+ - Executes an EnumPorts() call using the specified
+ info level. Currently only info levels 1 and 2 are supported.
+ </P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
->rpcclient</B
-> command line options during a
- running session. </P
+>enumdrivers [level]</B
+>
+ - Execute an EnumPrinterDrivers() call. This lists the various installed
+ printer drivers for all architectures. Refer to the MS Platform SDK
+ documentation for more details of the various flags and calling
+ options. Currently supported info levels are 1, 2, and 3.</P
></LI
><LI
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
->use</B
-> - Connect to a rmeote SMB
- server. <B
+>enumprinters [level]</B
+>
+ - Execute an EnumPrinters() call. This lists the various installed
+ and share printers. Refer to the MS Platform SDK documentation for
+ more details of the various flags and calling options. Currently
+ supported info levels are 0, 1, and 2.</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
->rpcclient</B
-> has the ability to
- maintain connections to multiple server simulaneously. </P
+>getdata &lt;printername&gt;</B
+>
+ - Retrieve the data for a given printer setting. See
+ the <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>enumdata</B
+> command for more information.
+ This command corresponds to the GetPrinterData() MS Platform
+ SDK function (* This command is currently unimplemented). </P
></LI
><LI
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
->help</B
+>getdriver &lt;printername&gt;</B
+>
+ - Retrieve the printer driver information (such as driver file,
+ config file, dependent files, etc...) for
+ the given printer. This command corresponds to the GetPrinterDriver()
+ MS Platform SDK function. Currently info level 1, 2, and 3 are supported.
+ </P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+><B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>getdriverdir &lt;arch&gt;</B
+>
+ - Execute a GetPrinterDriverDirectory()
+ RPC to retreive the SMB share name and subdirectory for
+ storing printer driver files for a given architecture. Possible
+ values for <TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>arch</I
+></TT
+> are "Windows 4.0"
+ (for Windows 95/98), "Windows NT x86", "Windows NT PowerPC", "Windows
+ Alpha_AXP", and "Windows NT R4000". </P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+><B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>getprinter &lt;printername&gt;</B
+>
+ - Retrieve the current printer information. This command
+ corresponds to the GetPrinter() MS Platform SDK function.
+ </P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+><B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>openprinter &lt;printername&gt;</B
+>
+ - Execute an OpenPrinterEx() and ClosePrinter() RPC
+ against a given printer. </P
+></LI
+></UL
+><P
+><I
+CLASS="EMPHASIS"
+>GENERAL OPTIONS</I
+></P
+><P
+></P
+><UL
+><LI
+><P
+><B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>debuglevel</B
+> - Set the current debug level
+ used to log information.</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+><B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>help (?)</B
> - Print a listing of all
known commands or extended help on a particular command.
</P
@@ -537,20 +557,19 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
->quit</B
+>quit (exit)</B
> - Exit <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>rpcclient
</B
->
- </P
+>.</P
></LI
></UL
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="REFSECT1"
><A
-NAME="AEN185"
+NAME="AEN190"
></A
><H2
>BUGS</H2
@@ -582,7 +601,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd(8)</B
> and <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
->rpcclient</B
+>rpcclient(1)</B
>
that are incompatible for some commands or services. Additionally,
the developers are sending reports to Microsoft, and problems found
@@ -592,18 +611,18 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
><DIV
CLASS="REFSECT1"
><A
-NAME="AEN195"
+NAME="AEN200"
></A
><H2
>VERSION</H2
><P
->This man page is correct for version 2.2 of
- the Samba suite.</P
+>This man page is correct for version 2.2 of the Samba
+ suite.</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="REFSECT1"
><A
-NAME="AEN198"
+NAME="AEN203"
></A
><H2
>AUTHOR</H2
@@ -613,9 +632,10 @@ NAME="AEN198"
by the Samba Team as an Open Source project similar
to the way the Linux kernel is developed.</P
><P
->The original rpcclient man page was written by Matthew Geddes,
- Luke Kenneth Casson, and Gerald Carter. The conversion to
- DocBook for Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald Carter</P
+>The original rpcclient man page was written by Matthew
+ Geddes, Luke Kenneth Casson, and rewriten by Gerald Carter.
+ The conversion to DocBook for Samba 2.2 was done by Gerald
+ Carter.</P
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/smb.conf.5.html b/docs/htmldocs/smb.conf.5.html
index 71f05fc1dc2..95523fee04c 100644
--- a/docs/htmldocs/smb.conf.5.html
+++ b/docs/htmldocs/smb.conf.5.html
@@ -134,7 +134,7 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS"
to the user of the service. Some housekeeping options are
also specifiable.</P
><P
->Sections are either filespace services (used by the
+>Sections are either file share services (used by the
client as an extension of their native file systems) or
printable services (used by the client to access print services
on the host running the server).</P
@@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ NAME="AEN50"
>parameters in this section apply to the server
as a whole, or are defaults for sections which do not
specifically define certain items. See the notes
- under paraMETERS for more information.</P
+ under PARAMETERS for more information.</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="REFSECT2"
@@ -426,7 +426,7 @@ CLASS="REFSECT1"
NAME="AEN101"
></A
><H2
->paraMETRS</H2
+>PARAMETERS</H2
><P
>parameters define the specific attributes of sections.</P
><P
@@ -539,7 +539,7 @@ CLASS="VARIABLELIST"
>%h</DT
><DD
><P
->the internet hostname that Samba is running
+>the Internet hostname that Samba is running
on.</P
></DD
><DT
@@ -561,7 +561,7 @@ CLASS="VARIABLELIST"
>%M</DT
><DD
><P
->the internet name of the client machine.
+>the Internet name of the client machine.
</P
></DD
><DT
@@ -749,10 +749,10 @@ NAME="AEN234"
>NOTE ABOUT USERNAME/PASSWORD VALIDATION</H2
><P
>There are a number of ways in which a user can connect
- to a service. The server follows the following steps in determining
+ to a service. The server uses the following steps in determining
if it will allow a connection to a specified service. If all the
- steps fail then the connection request is rejected. If one of the
- steps pass then the following steps are not checked.</P
+ steps fail, then the connection request is rejected. However, if one of the
+ steps succeeds, then the following steps are not checked.</P
><P
>If the service is marked "guest only = yes" then
steps 1 to 5 are skipped.</P
@@ -837,7 +837,16 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>add user script</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>addprinter command</I
+></TT
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -846,7 +855,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>allow trusted domains</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -855,7 +864,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>announce as</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -864,7 +873,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>announce version</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -873,7 +882,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>auto services</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -882,7 +891,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>bind interfaces only</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -900,7 +909,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>change notify timeout</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -909,7 +918,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>character set</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -918,7 +927,16 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>client code page</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>code page directory</I
+></TT
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -936,7 +954,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>config file</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -945,7 +963,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>deadtime</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -954,7 +972,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>debug hires timestamp</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -963,7 +981,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>debug pid</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -981,16 +999,16 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>debug uid</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
->debug level</I
+>debuglevel</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -999,7 +1017,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>default</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1008,7 +1026,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>default service</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1017,7 +1035,16 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>delete user script</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>deleteprinter command</I
+></TT
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1026,7 +1053,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>dfree command</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1035,7 +1062,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>dns proxy</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1044,7 +1071,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>domain admin group</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1053,7 +1080,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>domain admin users</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1071,7 +1098,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>domain guest group</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1080,7 +1107,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>domain guest users</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1089,7 +1116,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>domain logons</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1098,7 +1125,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>domain master</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1107,7 +1134,16 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>encrypt passwords</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>enumports command</I
+></TT
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1116,7 +1152,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>getwd cache</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1125,7 +1161,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>hide local users</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1134,7 +1170,16 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>homedir map</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>host msdfs</I
+></TT
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1143,7 +1188,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>hosts equiv</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1161,7 +1206,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>keepalive</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1170,7 +1215,16 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>kernel oplocks</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>lanman auth</I
+></TT
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1179,7 +1233,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>lm announce</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1188,7 +1242,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>lm interval</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1206,7 +1260,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>local master</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1215,7 +1269,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>lock dir</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1224,7 +1278,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>lock directory</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1233,7 +1287,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>log file</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1242,7 +1296,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>log level</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1260,7 +1314,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>logon home</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1269,7 +1323,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>logon path</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1278,7 +1332,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>logon script</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1287,7 +1341,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>lpq cache time</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1296,7 +1350,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>machine password timeout</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1305,7 +1359,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>mangled stack</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1314,7 +1368,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>map to guest</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1323,7 +1377,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>max disk size</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1332,7 +1386,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>max log size</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1341,7 +1395,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>max mux</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1350,16 +1404,25 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>max open files</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>max protocol</I
+></TT
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
->max packet</I
+>max smbd processes</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1368,7 +1431,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>max ttl</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1377,7 +1440,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>max wins ttl</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1386,7 +1449,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>max xmit</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1395,7 +1458,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>message command</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1404,7 +1467,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>min passwd length</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1413,7 +1476,16 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>min password length</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>min protocol</I
+></TT
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1422,7 +1494,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>min wins ttl</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1431,7 +1503,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>name resolve order</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1440,7 +1512,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>netbios aliases</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1449,7 +1521,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>netbios name</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1458,7 +1530,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>netbios scope</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1467,7 +1539,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>nis homedir</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1476,7 +1548,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>nt acl support</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1485,7 +1557,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>nt pipe support</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1494,7 +1566,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>nt smb support</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1503,15 +1575,6 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>null passwords</I
></TT
-> </P
-></LI
-><LI
-><P
-><TT
-CLASS="PARAMETER"
-><I
->ole locking compatibility</I
-></TT
></P
></LI
><LI
@@ -1521,7 +1584,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>oplock break wait time</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1530,7 +1593,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>os level</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1539,7 +1602,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>panic action</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1557,7 +1620,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>passwd chat debug</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1566,7 +1629,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>passwd program</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1575,7 +1638,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>password level</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1584,7 +1647,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>password server</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1593,7 +1656,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>prefered master</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1602,7 +1665,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>preferred master</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1611,7 +1674,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>preload</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1620,7 +1683,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>printcap</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1629,7 +1692,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>printcap name</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1638,7 +1701,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>printer driver file</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1647,7 +1710,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>private dir</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1656,7 +1719,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>protocol</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1665,7 +1728,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>read bmpx</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1674,7 +1737,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>read prediction</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1683,7 +1746,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>read raw</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1692,7 +1755,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>read size</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1701,7 +1764,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>remote announce</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1710,7 +1773,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>remote browse sync</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1719,7 +1782,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>restrict anonymous</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1728,7 +1791,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>root</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1737,7 +1800,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>root dir</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1746,7 +1809,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>root directory</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1755,7 +1818,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>security</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1764,16 +1827,16 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>server string</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
->shared mem size</I
+>show add printer wizard</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1782,7 +1845,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>smb passwd file</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1791,7 +1854,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>smbrun</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1800,7 +1863,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>socket address</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1809,7 +1872,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>socket options</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1818,7 +1881,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>source environment</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1827,7 +1890,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>ssl</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1836,7 +1899,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>ssl CA certDir</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1845,7 +1908,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>ssl CA certFile</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1854,7 +1917,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>ssl ciphers</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1863,7 +1926,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>ssl client cert</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1881,7 +1944,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>ssl compatibility</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1890,7 +1953,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>ssl hosts</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1899,7 +1962,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>ssl hosts resign</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1917,7 +1980,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>ssl require servercert</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1926,7 +1989,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>ssl server cert</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1935,7 +1998,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>ssl server key</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1944,7 +2007,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>ssl version</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1953,7 +2016,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>stat cache</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1962,7 +2025,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>stat cache size</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1971,7 +2034,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>strip dot</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1980,7 +2043,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>syslog</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -1989,7 +2052,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>syslog only</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2007,7 +2070,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>template shell</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2016,7 +2079,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>time offset</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2025,7 +2088,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>time server</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2034,7 +2097,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>timestamp logs</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2043,7 +2106,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>unix password sync</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2052,7 +2115,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>unix realname</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2061,7 +2124,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>update encrypted</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2070,7 +2133,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>use rhosts</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2079,7 +2142,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>username level</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2088,7 +2151,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>username map</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2097,7 +2160,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>utmp directory</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2106,7 +2169,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>valid chars</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2115,7 +2178,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>winbind cache time</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2124,7 +2187,16 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>winbind gid</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>winbind separator</I
+></TT
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2133,7 +2205,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>winbind uid</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2142,7 +2214,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>wins hook</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2151,7 +2223,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>wins proxy</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2160,7 +2232,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>wins server</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2169,7 +2241,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>wins support</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2178,7 +2250,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>workgroup</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2187,19 +2259,19 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>write raw</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
></UL
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="REFSECT1"
><A
-NAME="AEN710"
+NAME="AEN734"
></A
><H2
>COMPLETE LIST OF SERVICE PARAMETERS</H2
><P
->Here is a list of all service parameters. See the section of
+>Here is a list of all service parameters. See the section on
each parameter for details. Note that some are synonyms.</P
><P
></P
@@ -2211,7 +2283,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>admin users</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2220,16 +2292,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>allow hosts</I
></TT
-> </P
-></LI
-><LI
-><P
-><TT
-CLASS="PARAMETER"
-><I
->alternate permissions</I
-></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2238,7 +2301,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>available</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2256,7 +2319,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>browsable</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2265,7 +2328,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>browseable</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2274,7 +2337,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>case sensitive</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2283,7 +2346,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>casesignames</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2292,7 +2355,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>comment</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2301,7 +2364,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>copy</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2310,7 +2373,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>create mask</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2319,7 +2382,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>create mode</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2328,7 +2391,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>default case</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2337,7 +2400,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>delete readonly</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2346,7 +2409,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>delete veto files</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2355,7 +2418,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>deny hosts</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2364,7 +2427,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>directory</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2373,7 +2436,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>directory mask</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2382,7 +2445,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>directory mode</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2400,7 +2463,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>dont descend</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2409,7 +2472,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>dos filetime resolution</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2418,7 +2481,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>dos filetimes</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2427,7 +2490,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>exec</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2436,7 +2499,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>fake directory create times</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2445,7 +2508,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>fake oplocks</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2454,7 +2517,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>follow symlinks</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2463,7 +2526,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>force create mode</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2472,7 +2535,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>force directory mode</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2481,7 +2544,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>force directory security mode</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2490,7 +2553,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>force group</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2499,7 +2562,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>force security mode</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2508,7 +2571,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>force user</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2517,7 +2580,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>fstype</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2526,7 +2589,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>group</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2535,7 +2598,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>guest account</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2544,7 +2607,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>guest ok</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2553,7 +2616,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>guest only</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2571,7 +2634,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>hide files</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2580,7 +2643,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>hosts allow</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2589,7 +2652,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>hosts deny</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2598,7 +2661,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>include</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2607,7 +2670,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>inherit permissions</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2616,7 +2679,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>invalid users</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2625,7 +2688,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>level2 oplocks</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2634,7 +2697,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>locking</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2643,7 +2706,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>lppause command</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2652,7 +2715,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>lpq command</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2661,7 +2724,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>lpresume command</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2670,7 +2733,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>lprm command</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2679,7 +2742,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>magic output</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2688,7 +2751,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>magic script</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2697,7 +2760,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>mangle case</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2706,7 +2769,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>mangle locks</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2715,7 +2778,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>mangled map</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2724,7 +2787,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>mangled names</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2733,7 +2796,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>mangling char</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2742,7 +2805,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>map archive</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2760,7 +2823,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>map system</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2769,7 +2832,16 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>max connections</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>max print jobs</I
+></TT
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2778,7 +2850,16 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>min print space</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>msdfs root</I
+></TT
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2787,7 +2868,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>only guest</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2796,7 +2877,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>only user</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2805,7 +2886,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>oplock contention limit</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2814,7 +2895,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>oplocks</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2823,7 +2904,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>path</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2832,7 +2913,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>postexec</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2841,7 +2922,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>postscript</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2850,7 +2931,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>preexec</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2859,7 +2940,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>preexec close</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2868,7 +2949,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>preserve case</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2877,7 +2958,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>print command</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2886,7 +2967,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>print ok</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2895,7 +2976,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>printable</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2904,7 +2985,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>printer</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2913,7 +2994,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>printer admin</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2922,7 +3003,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>printer driver</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2931,7 +3012,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>printer driver location</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2940,7 +3021,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>printer name</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2958,7 +3039,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>public</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2967,7 +3048,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>queuepause command</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2976,7 +3057,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>queueresume command</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -2985,7 +3066,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>read list</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -3003,7 +3084,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>root postexec</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -3012,7 +3093,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>root preexec</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -3021,7 +3102,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>root preexec close</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -3030,7 +3111,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>security mask</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -3048,7 +3129,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>share modes</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -3057,7 +3138,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>short preserve case</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -3066,7 +3147,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>status</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -3075,7 +3156,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>strict locking</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -3093,7 +3174,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>sync always</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -3102,7 +3183,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>user</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -3111,7 +3192,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>username</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -3120,7 +3201,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>users</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -3129,7 +3210,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>utmp</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -3138,7 +3219,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>valid users</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -3147,7 +3228,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>veto files</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -3156,7 +3237,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>veto oplock files</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -3165,7 +3246,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>volume</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -3174,7 +3255,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>wide links</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -3183,7 +3264,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>writable</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -3192,7 +3273,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>write cache size</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -3210,7 +3291,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>write ok</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
><LI
><P
@@ -3219,14 +3300,14 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>writeable</I
></TT
-> </P
+></P
></LI
></UL
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="REFSECT1"
><A
-NAME="AEN1053"
+NAME="AEN1080"
></A
><H2
>EXPLANATION OF EACH PARAMETER</H2
@@ -3251,7 +3332,7 @@ HREF="smbd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
>smbd(8)
</A
-> under special circumstances decribed below.</P
+> under special circumstances described below.</P
><P
>Normally, a Samba server requires that UNIX users are
created for all users accessing files on this server. For sites
@@ -3309,10 +3390,9 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
></TT
> and
attempts to authenticate the given user with the given password. If the
- authentication succeeds then <A
-HREF="smbd.8.html"
-TARGET="_top"
->smbd</A
+ authentication succeeds then <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>smbd</B
>
attempts to find a UNIX user in the UNIX password database to map the
Windows user into. If this lookup fails, and <TT
@@ -3321,10 +3401,9 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
>add user script
</I
></TT
-> is set then <A
-HREF="smbd.8.html"
-TARGET="_top"
->smbd</A
+> is set then <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>smbd</B
> will
call the specified script <I
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
@@ -3337,17 +3416,16 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
></TT
> argument to be the user name to create.</P
><P
->If this script successfully creates the user then <A
-HREF="smbd.8.html"
-TARGET="_top"
->smbd</A
+>If this script successfully creates the user then <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>smbd
+ </B
> will continue on as though the UNIX user
already existed. In this way, UNIX users are dynamically created to
match existing Windows NT accounts.</P
><P
>See also <A
-HREF="smb.conf.5.html#security"
-TARGET="_top"
+HREF="#SECURITY"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
@@ -3355,17 +3433,16 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
></TT
></A
>, <A
-HREF="smb.conf.5.html#passwordserver"
-TARGET="_top"
+HREF="#PASSWORDSERVER"
> <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>password server</I
></TT
></A
->, <A
-HREF="smb.conf.5.html#deleteuserscript"
-TARGET="_top"
+>,
+ <A
+HREF="#DELETEUSERSCRIPT"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
@@ -3389,6 +3466,175 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
></DD
><DT
><A
+NAME="ADDPRINTERCOMMAND"
+></A
+>addprinter command (G)</DT
+><DD
+><P
+>With the introduction of MS-RPC based printing
+ support for Windows NT/2000 clients in Samba 2.2, The MS Add
+ Printer Wizard (APW) icon is now also available in the
+ "Printers..." folder displayed a share listing. The APW
+ allows for printers to be add remotely to a Samba or Windows
+ NT/2000 print server.</P
+><P
+>For a Samba host this means that the printer must be
+ physically added to underlying printing system. The <TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+> addprinter command</I
+></TT
+> defines a script to be run which
+ will perform the necessary operations for adding the printer
+ to the print system and to add the appropriate service definition
+ to the <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>smb.conf</TT
+> file in order that it can be
+ shared by <A
+HREF="smbd.8.html"
+TARGET="_top"
+><B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>smbd(8)</B
+>
+ </A
+>.</P
+><P
+>The <TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>addprinter command</I
+></TT
+> is
+ automatically invoked with the following parameter (in
+ order:</P
+><P
+></P
+><UL
+><LI
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>printer name</I
+></TT
+></P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>share name</I
+></TT
+></P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>port name</I
+></TT
+></P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>driver name</I
+></TT
+></P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>location</I
+></TT
+></P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>Windows 9x driver location</I
+></TT
+>
+ </P
+></LI
+></UL
+><P
+>All parameters are filled in from the PRINTER_INFO_2 structure sent
+ by the Windows NT/2000 client with one exception. The "Windows 9x
+ driver location" parameter is included for backwards compatibility
+ only. The remaining fields in the structure are generated from answers
+ to the APW questions.</P
+><P
+>Once the <TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>addprinter command</I
+></TT
+> has
+ been executed, <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>smbd</B
+> will reparse the <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+> smb.conf</TT
+> to determine if the share defined by the APW
+ exists. If the sharename is still invalid, then <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>smbd
+ </B
+> will return an ACCESS_DENIED error to the client.</P
+><P
+>See also <A
+HREF="#DELETEPRINTERCOMMAND"
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+> deleteprinter command</I
+></TT
+></A
+>, <A
+HREF="#PRINTING"
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>printing</I
+></TT
+></A
+>,
+ <A
+HREF="#SHOWADDPRINTERWIZARD"
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>show add
+ printer wizard</I
+></TT
+></A
+></P
+><P
+>Default: <I
+CLASS="EMPHASIS"
+>none</I
+></P
+><P
+>Example: <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>addprinter command = /usr/bin/addprinter
+ </B
+></P
+></DD
+><DT
+><A
NAME="ADMINUSERS"
></A
>admin users (S)</DT
@@ -3420,8 +3666,7 @@ NAME="ALLOWHOSTS"
><DD
><P
>Synonym for <A
-HREF="smb.conf.5.html#hostsallow"
-TARGET="_top"
+HREF="#HOSTSALLOW"
> <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
@@ -3438,20 +3683,20 @@ NAME="ALLOWTRUSTEDDOMAINS"
><DD
><P
>This option only takes effect when the <A
-HREF="smb.conf.5.html"
-TARGET="_top"
->security</A
-> option is set to
- <TT
+HREF="#SECURITY"
+><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
->server</I
+>security</I
></TT
+></A
+> option is set to
+ <TT
+CLASS="CONSTANT"
+>server</TT
> or <TT
-CLASS="PARAMETER"
-><I
->domain</I
-></TT
+CLASS="CONSTANT"
+>domain</TT
>.
If it is set to no, then attempts to connect to a resource from
a domain or workgroup other than the one which smbd is running
@@ -3490,7 +3735,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
>
will announce itself as, to a network neighborhood browse
list. By default this is set to Windows NT. The valid options
- are : "NT" (which is a synonym for "NT Server"), "NT Server",
+ are : "NT Server" (which can also be written as "NT"),
"NT Workstation", "Win95" or "WfW" meaning Windows NT Server,
Windows NT Workstation, Windows 95 and Windows for Workgroups
respectively. Do not change this parameter unless you have a
@@ -3537,32 +3782,15 @@ NAME="AUTOSERVICES"
>auto services (G)</DT
><DD
><P
->This is a list of services that you want to be
- automatically added to the browse lists. This is most useful
- for homes and printers services that would otherwise not be
- visible.</P
-><P
->Note that if you just want all printers in your
- printcap file loaded then the <A
-HREF="smb.conf.5.html#loadprinters"
-TARGET="_top"
+>This is a synonym for the <A
+HREF="#PRELOAD"
> <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
->load printers</I
+>preload</I
></TT
></A
-> option is easier.</P
-><P
->Default: <I
-CLASS="EMPHASIS"
->no auto services</I
-></P
-><P
->Example: <B
-CLASS="COMMAND"
->auto services = fred lp colorlp</B
-></P
+>.</P
></DD
><DT
><A
@@ -3916,6 +4144,11 @@ NAME="CASESENSITIVE"
HREF="#AEN201"
>NAME MANGLING</A
>.</P
+><P
+>Default: <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>case sensitive = no</B
+></P
></DD
><DT
><A
@@ -4163,7 +4396,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
>. This will output
the code page. The default for USA MS-DOS, Windows 95, and
Windows NT releases is code page 437. The default for western
- european releases of the above operating systems is code page 850.</P
+ European releases of the above operating systems is code page 850.</P
><P
>This parameter tells <A
HREF="smbd.8.html"
@@ -4312,6 +4545,14 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
chars</I
></TT
></A
+>, <A
+HREF="#CODEPAGEDIRECTORY"
+> <TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>code page directory</I
+></TT
+></A
></P
><P
>Default: <B
@@ -4326,6 +4567,39 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
></DD
><DT
><A
+NAME="CODEPAGEDIRECTORY"
+></A
+>code page directory (G)</DT
+><DD
+><P
+>Define the location of the various client code page
+ files.</P
+><P
+>See also <A
+HREF="#CLIENTCODEPAGE"
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>client
+ code page</I
+></TT
+></A
+></P
+><P
+>Default: <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>code page directory = ${prefix}/lib/codepages
+ </B
+></P
+><P
+>Example: <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>code page directory = /usr/share/samba/codepages
+ </B
+></P
+></DD
+><DT
+><A
NAME="CODINGSYSTEM"
></A
>codingsystem (G)</DT
@@ -4421,6 +4695,12 @@ CLASS="CONSTANT"
This is used for compatibility between Samba and CAP.</P
></LI
></UL
+><P
+>Default: <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>coding system = &lt;empty value&gt;</B
+>
+ </P
></DD
><DT
><A
@@ -4509,7 +4789,7 @@ NAME="COPY"
><P
>Default: <I
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
->none</I
+>no value</I
></P
><P
>Example: <B
@@ -4695,31 +4975,6 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
></DD
><DT
><A
-NAME="DEBUGTIMESTAMP"
-></A
->debug timestamp (G)</DT
-><DD
-><P
->Samba 2.2 debug log messages are timestamped
- by default. If you are running at a high <A
-HREF="#DEBUGLEVEL"
-> <TT
-CLASS="PARAMETER"
-><I
->debug level</I
-></TT
-></A
-> these timestamps
- can be distracting. This boolean parameter allows timestamping
- to be turned off.</P
-><P
->Default: <B
-CLASS="COMMAND"
->debug timestamp = yes</B
-></P
-></DD
-><DT
-><A
NAME="DEBUGPID"
></A
>debug pid (G)</DT
@@ -4748,6 +5003,31 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
></DD
><DT
><A
+NAME="DEBUGTIMESTAMP"
+></A
+>debug timestamp (G)</DT
+><DD
+><P
+>Samba 2.2 debug log messages are timestamped
+ by default. If you are running at a high <A
+HREF="#DEBUGLEVEL"
+> <TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>debug level</I
+></TT
+></A
+> these timestamps
+ can be distracting. This boolean parameter allows timestamping
+ to be turned off.</P
+><P
+>Default: <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>debug timestamp = yes</B
+></P
+></DD
+><DT
+><A
NAME="DEBUGUID"
></A
>debug uid (G)</DT
@@ -4778,7 +5058,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
><A
NAME="DEBUGLEVEL"
></A
->debug level (G)</DT
+>debuglevel (G)</DT
><DD
><P
>The value of the parameter (an integer) allows
@@ -4823,7 +5103,7 @@ NAME="DEFAULTCASE"
><P
>See the section on <A
HREF="#AEN201"
-> NAME MANGLING"</A
+> NAME MANGLING</A
>. Also note the <A
HREF="#SHORTPRESERVECASE"
> <TT
@@ -4833,6 +5113,11 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
></TT
></A
> parameter.</P
+><P
+>Default: <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>default case = lower</B
+></P
></DD
><DT
><A
@@ -4886,16 +5171,35 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
interesting things.</P
><P
>Example:</P
+><P
><PRE
-CLASS="SCREEN"
-><TT
-CLASS="COMPUTEROUTPUT"
-> default service = pub
+CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
+>[global]
+ default service = pub
- [pub]
- path = /%S
- </TT
-></PRE
+[pub]
+ path = /%S
+ </PRE
+></P
+></DD
+><DT
+><A
+NAME="DELETEREADONLY"
+></A
+>delete readonly (S)</DT
+><DD
+><P
+>This parameter allows readonly files to be deleted.
+ This is not normal DOS semantics, but is allowed by UNIX.</P
+><P
+>This option may be useful for running applications such
+ as rcs, where UNIX file ownership prevents changing file
+ permissions, and DOS semantics prevent deletion of a read only file.</P
+><P
+>Default: <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>delete readonly = no</B
+></P
></DD
><DT
><A
@@ -4916,7 +5220,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd(8)</B
></A
> under special circumstances
- decribed below.</P
+ described below.</P
><P
>Normally, a Samba server requires that UNIX users are
created for all users accessing files on this server. For sites
@@ -5077,21 +5381,99 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
></DD
><DT
><A
-NAME="DELETEREADONLY"
+NAME="DELETEPRINTERCOMMAND"
></A
->delete readonly (S)</DT
+>deleteprinter command (G)</DT
><DD
><P
->This parameter allows readonly files to be deleted.
- This is not normal DOS semantics, but is allowed by UNIX.</P
+>With the introduction of MS-RPC based printer
+ support for Windows NT/2000 clients in Samba 2.2, it is now
+ possible to delete printer at run time by issuing the
+ DeletePrinter() RPC call.</P
><P
->This option may be useful for running applications such
- as rcs, where UNIX file ownership prevents changing file
- permissions, and DOS semantics prevent deletion of a read only file.</P
+>For a Samba host this means that the printer must be
+ physically deleted from underlying printing system. The <TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+> deleteprinter command</I
+></TT
+> defines a script to be run which
+ will perform the necessary operations for removing the printer
+ from the print system and from <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>smb.conf</TT
+>.
+ </P
><P
->Default: <B
+>The <TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>deleteprinter command</I
+></TT
+> is
+ automatically called with only one parameter: <TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+> "printer name"</I
+></TT
+>.</P
+><P
+>Once the <TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>deleteprinter command</I
+></TT
+> has
+ been executed, <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
->delete readonly = no</B
+>smbd</B
+> will reparse the <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+> smb.conf</TT
+> to associated printer no longer exists.
+ If the sharename is still valid, then <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>smbd
+ </B
+> will return an ACCESS_DENIED error to the client.</P
+><P
+>See also <A
+HREF="#ADDPRINTERCOMMAND"
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+> addprinter command</I
+></TT
+></A
+>, <A
+HREF="#PRINTING"
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>printing</I
+></TT
+></A
+>,
+ <A
+HREF="#SHOWADDPRINTERWIZARD"
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>show add
+ printer wizard</I
+></TT
+></A
+></P
+><P
+>Default: <I
+CLASS="EMPHASIS"
+>none</I
+></P
+><P
+>Example: <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>deleteprinter command = /usr/bin/removeprinter
+ </B
></P
></DD
><DT
@@ -5200,7 +5582,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
CLASS="FILENAME"
>./</TT
>. The script should return two
- integers in ascii. The first should be the total disk space in blocks,
+ integers in ASCII. The first should be the total disk space in blocks,
and the second should be the number of available blocks. An optional
third return value can give the block size in bytes. The default
blocksize is 1024 bytes.</P
@@ -5732,9 +6114,36 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
NT PDC is able to do so then cross subnet browsing will behave
strangely and may fail.</P
><P
+>If <A
+HREF="#DOMAINLOGONS"
+><B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>domain logons = yes</B
+>
+ </A
+>, then the default behavior is to enable the <TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>domain
+ master</I
+></TT
+> parameter. If <TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>domain logons</I
+></TT
+> is
+ not enabled (the default setting), then neither will <TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>domain
+ master</I
+></TT
+> be enabled by default.</P
+><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
->domain master = no</B
+>domain master = auto</B
></P
></DD
><DT
@@ -5896,6 +6305,53 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
></DD
><DT
><A
+NAME="ENUMPORTSCOMMAND"
+></A
+>enumports command (G)</DT
+><DD
+><P
+>The concept of a "port" is fairly foreign
+ to UNIX hosts. Under Windows NT/2000 print servers, a port
+ is associated with a port monitor and generally takes the form of
+ a local port (i.e. LPT1:, COM1:, FILE:) or a remote port
+ (i.e. LPD Port Monitor, etc...). By default, Samba has only one
+ port defined--<TT
+CLASS="CONSTANT"
+>"Samba Printer Port"</TT
+>. Under
+ Windows NT/2000, all printers must have a valid port name.
+ If you wish to have a list of ports displayed (<B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>smbd
+ </B
+> does not use a port name for anything) other than
+ the default <TT
+CLASS="CONSTANT"
+>"Samba Printer Port"</TT
+>, you
+ can define <TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>enumports command</I
+></TT
+> to point to
+ a program which should generate a list of ports, one per line,
+ to standard output. This listing will then be used in response
+ to the level 1 and 2 EnumPorts() RPC.</P
+><P
+>Default: <I
+CLASS="EMPHASIS"
+>no enumports command</I
+></P
+><P
+>Example: <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>enumports command = /usr/bin/listports
+ </B
+></P
+></DD
+><DT
+><A
NAME="EXEC"
></A
>exec (S)</DT
@@ -5936,9 +6392,11 @@ NAME="FAKEDIRECTORYCREATETIMES"
><P
>However, Unix time semantics mean that the create time
reported by Samba will be updated whenever a file is created or
- deleted in the directory. NMAKE therefore finds all object files
- in the object directory bar the last one built are out of date
- compared to the directory and rebuilds them. Enabling this option
+ or deleted in the directory. NMAKE finds all object files in
+ the object directory. The timestamp of the last one built is then
+ compared to the timestamp of the object dircetory. If the
+ directory's timestamp if newer, then all object files
+ will be rebuilt. Enabling this option
ensures directories always predate their contents and an NMAKE build
will proceed as expected.</P
><P
@@ -6053,7 +6511,7 @@ NAME="FORCECREATEMODE"
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
>always</I
> be set on a
- file by Samba. This is done by bitwise 'OR'ing these bits onto
+ file created by Samba. This is done by bitwise 'OR'ing these bits onto
the mode bits of a file that is being created or having its
permissions changed. The default for this parameter is (in octal)
000. The modes in this parameter are bitwise 'OR'ed onto the file
@@ -6164,7 +6622,8 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
><A
NAME="FORCEDIRECTORYSECURITYMODE"
></A
->force directory security mode (S)</DT
+>force directory
+ security mode (S)</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter controls what UNIX permission bits
@@ -6189,7 +6648,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
></A
> parameter. To allow
a user to modify all the user/group/world permissions on a
- directory, with restrictions set this parameter to 000.</P
+ directory without restrictions, set this parameter to 000.</P
><P
><I
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
@@ -6410,9 +6869,7 @@ NAME="FORCEUSER"
Thus clients still need to connect as a valid user and supply a
valid password. Once connected, all file operations will be performed
as the "forced user", no matter what username the client connected
- as.</P
-><P
->This can be very useful.</P
+ as. This can be very useful.</P
><P
>In Samba 2.0.5 and above this parameter also causes the
primary group of the forced user to be used as the primary group
@@ -6508,7 +6965,7 @@ CLASS="CONSTANT"
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
->getwd cache = No</B
+>getwd cache = yes</B
></P
></DD
><DT
@@ -6546,7 +7003,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
></TT
></A
> (see below). Whatever privileges this
- ser has will be available to any client connecting to the guest service.
+ user has will be available to any client connecting to the guest service.
Typically this user will exist in the password file, but will not
have a valid login. The user account "ftp" is often a good choice
for this parameter. If a username is specified in a given service,
@@ -6589,7 +7046,7 @@ NAME="GUESTOK"
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>yes</TT
> for
- a service, then no password is equired to connect to the service.
+ a service, then no password is required to connect to the service.
Privileges will be those of the <A
HREF="#GUESTACCOUNT"
><TT
@@ -6832,7 +7289,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
->homedir map = auto.home</B
+>homedir map = &lt;empty string&gt;</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
@@ -6842,6 +7299,46 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
></DD
><DT
><A
+NAME="HOSTMSDFS"
+></A
+>host msdfs (G)</DT
+><DD
+><P
+>This boolean parameter is only available
+ if Samba has been configured and compiled with the <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+> --with-msdfs</B
+> option. If set to <TT
+CLASS="CONSTANT"
+>yes</TT
+>,
+ Samba will act as a Dfs server, and allow Dfs-aware clients
+ to browse Dfs trees hosted on the server.</P
+><P
+>See also the <A
+HREF="#MSDFSROOT"
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+> msdfs root</I
+></TT
+></A
+> share level parameter. For
+ more information on setting up a Dfs tree on Samba,
+ refer to <A
+HREF="msdfs_setup.html"
+TARGET="_top"
+>msdfs_setup.html</A
+>.
+ </P
+><P
+>Default: <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>host msdfs = no</B
+></P
+></DD
+><DT
+><A
NAME="HOSTSALLOW"
></A
>hosts allow (S)</DT
@@ -7269,11 +7766,11 @@ NAME="INTERFACES"
><P
>The "mask" parameters can either be a bit length (such
as 24 for a C class network) or a full netmask in dotted
- decmal form.</P
+ decimal form.</P
><P
>The "IP" parameters above can either be a full dotted
decimal IP address or a hostname which will be looked up via
- the OSes normal hostname resolution mechanisms.</P
+ the OS's normal hostname resolution mechanisms.</P
><P
>For example, the following line:</P
><P
@@ -7297,6 +7794,12 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
></TT
></A
>.</P
+><P
+>Default: <I
+CLASS="EMPHASIS"
+>all active interfaces except 127.0.0.1
+ that are broadcast capable</I
+></P
></DD
><DT
><A
@@ -7400,12 +7903,12 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
->keepalive = 0</B
+>keepalive = 300</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
->keepalive = 60</B
+>keepalive = 600</B
></P
></DD
><DT
@@ -7415,7 +7918,7 @@ NAME="KERNELOPLOCKS"
>kernel oplocks (G)</DT
><DD
><P
->For UNIXs that support kernel based <A
+>For UNIXes that support kernel based <A
HREF="#OPLOCKS"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
@@ -7486,6 +7989,24 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
></DD
><DT
><A
+NAME="LANMANAUTH"
+></A
+>lanman auth (G)</DT
+><DD
+><P
+>This parameter determines whether or not smbd will
+ attempt to authentication users using the LANMAN password hash.
+ If disabled, only clients which support NT password hashes (e.g. Windows
+ NT/2000 clients, smbclient, etc... but not Windows 95/98 or the MS DOS
+ network client) will be able to connect to the Samba host.</P
+><P
+>Default : <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>lanman auth = yes</B
+></P
+></DD
+><DT
+><A
NAME="LEVEL2OPLOCKS"
></A
>level2 oplocks (S)</DT
@@ -7501,7 +8022,7 @@ NAME="LEVEL2OPLOCKS"
exclusive oplocks). This allows all openers of the file that
support level2 oplocks to cache the file for read-ahead only (ie.
they may not cache writes or lock requests) and increases performance
- for many acesses of files that are not commonly written (such as
+ for many accesses of files that are not commonly written (such as
application .EXE files).</P
><P
>Once one of the clients which have a read-only oplock
@@ -7510,8 +8031,7 @@ NAME="LEVEL2OPLOCKS"
delete any read-ahead caches.</P
><P
>It is recommended that this parameter be turned on
- to speed access to shared executables (and also to test
- the code :-).</P
+ to speed access to shared executables.</P
><P
>For more discussions on level2 oplocks see the CIFS spec.</P
><P
@@ -7563,7 +8083,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
->level2 oplocks = False</B
+>level2 oplocks = yes</B
></P
></DD
><DT
@@ -7643,7 +8163,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
->lm announce = true</B
+>lm announce = yes</B
></P
></DD
><DT
@@ -7803,12 +8323,12 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
->lock directory = /tmp/samba</B
+>lock directory = ${prefix}/var/locks</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
->lock directory = /usr/local/samba/var/locks</B
+>lock directory = /var/run/samba/locks</B
>
</P
></DD
@@ -7866,7 +8386,7 @@ NAME="LOGFILE"
>log file (G)</DT
><DD
><P
->This options allows you to override the name
+>This option allows you to override the name
of the Samba log file (also known as the debug file).</P
><P
>This option takes the standard substitutions, allowing
@@ -7960,7 +8480,7 @@ CLASS="USERINPUT"
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
->logon home = \\%L\%U\profile</B
+>logon home = \\%N\%U\profile</B
></P
><P
>This tells Samba to return the above string, with
@@ -8372,8 +8892,11 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>lpq command</I
></TT
-> as the PATH may not be
- available to the server.</P
+> as the <TT
+CLASS="ENVAR"
+>$PATH
+ </TT
+> may not be available to the server.</P
><P
>See also the <A
HREF="#PRINTING"
@@ -8398,7 +8921,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
->lpq command = /usr/bin/lpq %p</B
+>lpq command = /usr/bin/lpq -P%p</B
></P
></DD
><DT
@@ -8716,6 +9239,11 @@ NAME="MANGLECASE"
HREF="#AEN201"
> NAME MANGLING</A
></P
+><P
+>Default: <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>mangle case = no</B
+></P
></DD
><DT
><A
@@ -8757,7 +9285,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
>;1
</TT
> off the ends of filenames on some CDROMS (only visible
- under some UNIXs). To do this use a map of (*;1 *;).</P
+ under some UNIXes). To do this use a map of (*;1 *;).</P
><P
>Default: <I
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
@@ -8856,34 +9384,6 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
></DD
><DT
><A
-NAME="MANGLINGCHAR"
-></A
->mangling char (S)</DT
-><DD
-><P
->This controls what character is used as
- the <I
-CLASS="EMPHASIS"
->magic</I
-> character in <A
-HREF="#AEN201"
->name mangling</A
->. The default is a '~'
- but this may interfere with some software. Use this option to set
- it to whatever you prefer.</P
-><P
->Default: <B
-CLASS="COMMAND"
->mangling char = ~</B
-></P
-><P
->Example: <B
-CLASS="COMMAND"
->mangling char = ^</B
-></P
-></DD
-><DT
-><A
NAME="MANGLEDSTACK"
></A
>mangled stack (G)</DT
@@ -8921,6 +9421,34 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
></DD
><DT
><A
+NAME="MANGLINGCHAR"
+></A
+>mangling char (S)</DT
+><DD
+><P
+>This controls what character is used as
+ the <I
+CLASS="EMPHASIS"
+>magic</I
+> character in <A
+HREF="#AEN201"
+>name mangling</A
+>. The default is a '~'
+ but this may interfere with some software. Use this option to set
+ it to whatever you prefer.</P
+><P
+>Default: <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>mangling char = ~</B
+></P
+><P
+>Example: <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>mangling char = ^</B
+></P
+></DD
+><DT
+><A
NAME="MAPARCHIVE"
></A
>map archive (S)</DT
@@ -9303,6 +9831,153 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
></DD
><DT
><A
+NAME="MAXPRINTJOBS"
+></A
+>max print jobs (S)</DT
+><DD
+><P
+>This parameter limits the maximum number of
+ jobs allowable in a Samba printer queue at any given moment.
+ If this number is exceeded, <A
+HREF="smbd.8.html"
+TARGET="_top"
+><B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+> smbd(8)</B
+></A
+> will remote "Out of Space" to the client.
+ </P
+><P
+>Default: <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>max print jobs = 1000</B
+></P
+><P
+>Example: <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>max print jobs = 5000</B
+></P
+></DD
+><DT
+><A
+NAME="MAXPROTOCOL"
+></A
+>max protocol (G)</DT
+><DD
+><P
+>The value of the parameter (a string) is the highest
+ protocol level that will be supported by the server.</P
+><P
+>Possible values are :</P
+><P
+></P
+><UL
+><LI
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="CONSTANT"
+>CORE</TT
+>: Earliest version. No
+ concept of user names.</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="CONSTANT"
+>COREPLUS</TT
+>: Slight improvements on
+ CORE for efficiency.</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="CONSTANT"
+>LANMAN1</TT
+>: First <I
+CLASS="EMPHASIS"
+> modern</I
+> version of the protocol. Long filename
+ support.</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="CONSTANT"
+>LANMAN2</TT
+>: Updates to Lanman1 protocol.
+ </P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+><TT
+CLASS="CONSTANT"
+>NT1</TT
+>: Current up to date version of
+ the protocol. Used by Windows NT. Known as CIFS.</P
+></LI
+></UL
+><P
+>Normally this option should not be set as the automatic
+ negotiation phase in the SMB protocol takes care of choosing
+ the appropriate protocol.</P
+><P
+>See also <A
+HREF="#MINPROTOCOL"
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>min
+ protocol</I
+></TT
+></A
+></P
+><P
+>Default: <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>max protocol = NT1</B
+></P
+><P
+>Example: <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>max protocol = LANMAN1</B
+></P
+></DD
+><DT
+><A
+NAME="MAXSMBDPROCESSES"
+></A
+>max smbd processes (G)</DT
+><DD
+><P
+>This parameter limits the maximum number of
+ <A
+HREF="smbd.8.html"
+TARGET="_top"
+><B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>smbd(8)</B
+></A
+>
+ processes concurrently running on a system and is intended
+ as a stop gap to prevent degrading service to clients in the event
+ that the server has insufficient resources to handle more than this
+ number of connections. Remember that under normal operating
+ conditions, each user will have an smbd associated with him or her
+ to handle connections to all shares from a given host.
+ </P
+><P
+>Default: <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>max smbd processes = 0</B
+> ## no limit</P
+><P
+>Example: <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>max smbd processes = 1000</B
+></P
+></DD
+><DT
+><A
NAME="MAXTTL"
></A
>max ttl (G)</DT
@@ -9517,39 +10192,6 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
></DD
><DT
><A
-NAME="MINPRINTSPACE"
-></A
->min print space (S)</DT
-><DD
-><P
->This sets the minimum amount of free disk
- space that must be available before a user will be able to spool
- a print job. It is specified in kilobytes. The default is 0, which
- means a user can always spool a print job.</P
-><P
->See also the <A
-HREF="#PRINTING"
-><TT
-CLASS="PARAMETER"
-><I
->printing
- </I
-></TT
-></A
-> parameter.</P
-><P
->Default: <B
-CLASS="COMMAND"
->min print space = 0</B
-></P
-><P
->Example: <B
-CLASS="COMMAND"
->min print space = 2000</B
-></P
-></DD
-><DT
-><A
NAME="MINPASSWDLENGTH"
></A
>min passwd length (G)</DT
@@ -9611,6 +10253,89 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
></DD
><DT
><A
+NAME="MINPRINTSPACE"
+></A
+>min print space (S)</DT
+><DD
+><P
+>This sets the minimum amount of free disk
+ space that must be available before a user will be able to spool
+ a print job. It is specified in kilobytes. The default is 0, which
+ means a user can always spool a print job.</P
+><P
+>See also the <A
+HREF="#PRINTING"
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>printing
+ </I
+></TT
+></A
+> parameter.</P
+><P
+>Default: <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>min print space = 0</B
+></P
+><P
+>Example: <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>min print space = 2000</B
+></P
+></DD
+><DT
+><A
+NAME="MINPROTOCOL"
+></A
+>min protocol (G)</DT
+><DD
+><P
+>The value of the parameter (a string) is the
+ lowest SMB protocol dialect than Samba will support. Please refer
+ to the <A
+HREF="#MAXPROTOCOL"
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>max protocol</I
+></TT
+></A
+>
+ parameter for a list of valid protocol names and a brief description
+ of each. You may also wish to refer to the C source code in
+ <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>source/smbd/negprot.c</TT
+> for a listing of known protocol
+ dialects supported by clients.</P
+><P
+>If you are viewing this parameter as a security measure, you should
+ also refer to the <A
+HREF="#LANMANAUTH"
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>lanman
+ auth</I
+></TT
+></A
+> parameter. Otherwise, you should never need
+ to change this parameter.</P
+><P
+>Default : <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>min protocol = CORE</B
+></P
+><P
+>Example : <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>min protocol = NT1</B
+> # disable DOS
+ clients</P
+></DD
+><DT
+><A
NAME="MINWINSTTL"
></A
>min wins ttl (G)</DT
@@ -9644,6 +10369,52 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
></DD
><DT
><A
+NAME="MSDFSROOT"
+></A
+>msdfs root (S)</DT
+><DD
+><P
+>This boolean parameter is only available if
+ Samba is configured and compiled with the <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+> --with-msdfs</B
+> option. If set to <TT
+CLASS="CONSTANT"
+>yes&#62;</TT
+>,
+ Samba treats the share as a Dfs root and allows clients to browse
+ the distributed file system tree rooted at the share directory.
+ Dfs links are specified in the share directory by symbolic
+ links of the form <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>msdfs:serverA\shareA,serverB\shareB
+ </TT
+> and so on. For more information on setting up a Dfs tree
+ on Samba, refer to <A
+HREF="msdfs_setup.html"
+TARGET="_top"
+>msdfs_setup.html
+ </A
+>.</P
+><P
+>See also <A
+HREF="#HOSTMSDFS"
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>host msdfs
+ </I
+></TT
+></A
+></P
+><P
+>Default: <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>msdfs root = no</B
+></P
+></DD
+><DT
+><A
NAME="NAMERESOLVEORDER"
></A
>name resolve order (G)</DT
@@ -9949,9 +10720,11 @@ CLASS="CONSTANT"
This information may be of use if any users are having problems
with NT SMB support.</P
><P
+>You should not need to ever disable this parameter.</P
+><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
->nt support = yes</B
+>nt smb support = yes</B
></P
></DD
><DT
@@ -9977,47 +10750,6 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
></DD
><DT
><A
-NAME="OLELOCKINGCOMPATIBILITY"
-></A
->ole locking compatibility (G)</DT
-><DD
-><P
->This parameter allows an administrator to turn
- off the byte range lock manipulation that is done within Samba to
- give compatibility for OLE applications. Windows OLE applications
- use byte range locking as a form of inter-process communication, by
- locking ranges of bytes around the 2^32 region of a file range. This
- can cause certain UNIX lock managers to crash or otherwise cause
- problems. Setting this parameter to <TT
-CLASS="CONSTANT"
->no</TT
-> means you
- trust your UNIX lock manager to handle such cases correctly.</P
-><P
->Default: <B
-CLASS="COMMAND"
->ole locking compatibility = yes</B
-></P
-></DD
-><DT
-><A
-NAME="ONLYGUEST"
-></A
->only guest (S)</DT
-><DD
-><P
->A synonym for <A
-HREF="#GUESTONLY"
-><TT
-CLASS="PARAMETER"
-><I
-> guest only</I
-></TT
-></A
->.</P
-></DD
-><DT
-><A
NAME="ONLYUSER"
></A
>only user (S)</DT
@@ -10066,70 +10798,44 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
></DD
><DT
><A
-NAME="OPLOCKS"
+NAME="OLELOCKINGCOMPATIBILITY"
></A
->oplocks (S)</DT
+>ole locking compatibility (G)</DT
><DD
><P
->This boolean option tells smbd whether to
- issue oplocks (opportunistic locks) to file open requests on this
- share. The oplock code can dramatically (approx. 30% or more) improve
- the speed of access to files on Samba servers. It allows the clients
- to aggressively cache files ocally and you may want to disable this
- option for unreliable network environments (it is turned on by
- default in Windows NT Servers). For more information see the file
- <TT
-CLASS="FILENAME"
->Speed.txt</TT
-> in the Samba <TT
-CLASS="FILENAME"
->docs/</TT
->
- directory.</P
+>This parameter allows an administrator to turn
+ off the byte range lock manipulation that is done within Samba to
+ give compatibility for OLE applications. Windows OLE applications
+ use byte range locking as a form of inter-process communication, by
+ locking ranges of bytes around the 2^32 region of a file range. This
+ can cause certain UNIX lock managers to crash or otherwise cause
+ problems. Setting this parameter to <TT
+CLASS="CONSTANT"
+>no</TT
+> means you
+ trust your UNIX lock manager to handle such cases correctly.</P
><P
->Oplocks may be selectively turned off on certain files on
- a per share basis. See the <A
-HREF="#VETOOPLOCKFILES"
-><TT
-CLASS="PARAMETER"
-><I
-> veto oplock files</I
-></TT
+>Default: <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>ole locking compatibility = yes</B
+></P
+></DD
+><DT
+><A
+NAME="ONLYGUEST"
></A
-> parameter. On some systems
- oplocks are recognized by the underlying operating system. This
- allows data synchronization between all access to oplocked files,
- whether it be via Samba or NFS or a local UNIX process. See the
- <TT
-CLASS="PARAMETER"
-><I
->kernel oplocks</I
-></TT
-> parameter for details.</P
+>only guest (S)</DT
+><DD
><P
->See also the <A
-HREF="#KERNELOPLOCKS"
-><TT
-CLASS="PARAMETER"
-><I
->kernel
- oplocks</I
-></TT
-></A
-> and <A
-HREF="#LEVEL2OPLOCKS"
+>A synonym for <A
+HREF="#GUESTONLY"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
-> level2 oplocks</I
+> guest only</I
></TT
></A
-> parameters.</P
-><P
->Default: <B
-CLASS="COMMAND"
->oplocks = yes</B
-></P
+>.</P
></DD
><DT
><A
@@ -10154,7 +10860,7 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS"
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
->oplock break wait time = 10</B
+>oplock break wait time = 0</B
></P
></DD
><DT
@@ -10198,6 +10904,73 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
></DD
><DT
><A
+NAME="OPLOCKS"
+></A
+>oplocks (S)</DT
+><DD
+><P
+>This boolean option tells smbd whether to
+ issue oplocks (opportunistic locks) to file open requests on this
+ share. The oplock code can dramatically (approx. 30% or more) improve
+ the speed of access to files on Samba servers. It allows the clients
+ to aggressively cache files locally and you may want to disable this
+ option for unreliable network environments (it is turned on by
+ default in Windows NT Servers). For more information see the file
+ <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>Speed.txt</TT
+> in the Samba <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>docs/</TT
+>
+ directory.</P
+><P
+>Oplocks may be selectively turned off on certain files on
+ a per share basis. See the <A
+HREF="#VETOOPLOCKFILES"
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+> veto oplock files</I
+></TT
+></A
+> parameter. On some systems
+ oplocks are recognized by the underlying operating system. This
+ allows data synchronization between all access to oplocked files,
+ whether it be via Samba or NFS or a local UNIX process. See the
+ <TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>kernel oplocks</I
+></TT
+> parameter for details.</P
+><P
+>See also the <A
+HREF="#KERNELOPLOCKS"
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>kernel
+ oplocks</I
+></TT
+></A
+> and <A
+HREF="#LEVEL2OPLOCKS"
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+> level2 oplocks</I
+></TT
+></A
+> parameters.</P
+><P
+>Default: <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>oplocks = yes</B
+></P
+></DD
+><DT
+><A
NAME="OSLEVEL"
></A
>os level (G)</DT
@@ -10215,19 +10988,24 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
> WORKGROUP</I
></TT
-> in the local broadcast area. The default is
- zero, which means <B
-CLASS="COMMAND"
->nmbd</B
-> will lose elections to
- Windows machines. See <TT
+> in the local broadcast area.</P
+><P
+><I
+CLASS="EMPHASIS"
+>Note :</I
+>By default, Samba will win
+ a local master browsing election over all Microsoft operating
+ systems except a Windows NT 4.0/2000 Domain Controller. This
+ means that a misconfigured Samba host can effectively isolate
+ a subnet for browsing purposes. See <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
->BROWSING.txt</TT
-> in the
- Samba <TT
+>BROWSING.txt
+ </TT
+> in the Samba <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>docs/</TT
-> directory for details.</P
+> directory
+ for details.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
@@ -10392,8 +11170,8 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
->passwd chat = *old*password* %o\n *new*
- password* %n\n *new*password* %n\n *changed*</B
+>passwd chat = *new*password* %n\n
+ *new*password* %n\n *changed*</B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
@@ -10474,11 +11252,6 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
CLASS="COMMAND"
>passwd chat debug = no</B
></P
-><P
->Example: <B
-CLASS="COMMAND"
->passwd chat debug = yes</B
-></P
></DD
><DT
><A
@@ -10593,7 +11366,10 @@ NAME="PASSWORDLEVEL"
with mixed-case passwords. One offending client is Windows for
Workgroups, which for some reason forces passwords to upper
case when using the LANMAN1 protocol, but leaves them alone when
- using COREPLUS!</P
+ using COREPLUS! Another problem child is the Windows 95/98
+ family of operating systems. These clients upper case clear
+ text passwords even when NT LM 0.12 selected by the protocol
+ negotiation request/response.</P
><P
>This parameter defines the maximum number of characters
that may be upper case in passwords.</P
@@ -10657,9 +11433,9 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
> you can get Samba
to do all its username/password validation via a remote server.</P
><P
->This options sets the name of the password server to use.
+>This option sets the name of the password server to use.
It must be a NetBIOS name, so if the machine's NetBIOS name is
- different from its internet name then you may have to add its NetBIOS
+ different from its Internet name then you may have to add its NetBIOS
name to the lmhosts file which is stored in the same directory
as the <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
@@ -10680,7 +11456,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
by any method and order described in that parameter.</P
><P
>The password server much be a machine capable of using
- the "LM1.2X002" or the "LM NT 0.12" protocol, and it must be in
+ the "LM1.2X002" or the "NT LM 0.12" protocol, and it must be in
user level security mode.</P
><P
><I
@@ -10706,8 +11482,8 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
</I
></TT
>, which means the Samba server will use the incoming
- client as the passwordserver. If you use this then you better
- trust your clients, and you better restrict them with hosts allow!</P
+ client as the password server. If you use this then you better
+ trust your clients, and you had better restrict them with hosts allow!</P
><P
>If the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
@@ -10720,8 +11496,8 @@ CLASS="CONSTANT"
>domain</TT
>, then the list of machines in this
option must be a list of Primary or Backup Domain controllers for the
- Domain or the character '*', as the Samba server is cryptographicly
- in that domain, and will use cryptographicly authenticated RPC calls
+ Domain or the character '*', as the Samba server is effectively
+ in that domain, and will use cryptographically authenticated RPC calls
to authenticate the user logging on. The advantage of using <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
> security = domain</B
@@ -11089,7 +11865,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
->preferred master = no</B
+>preferred master = auto</B
></P
></DD
><DT
@@ -11116,15 +11892,31 @@ NAME="PRELOAD"
>preload</DT
><DD
><P
->Synonym for <A
-HREF="#AUTOSERVICES"
-><TT
+>This is a list of services that you want to be
+ automatically added to the browse lists. This is most useful
+ for homes and printers services that would otherwise not be
+ visible.</P
+><P
+>Note that if you just want all printers in your
+ printcap file loaded then the <A
+HREF="#LOADPRINTERS"
+> <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
-> auto services</I
+>load printers</I
></TT
></A
->.</P
+> option is easier.</P
+><P
+>Default: <I
+CLASS="EMPHASIS"
+>no preloaded services</I
+></P
+><P
+>Example: <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>preload = fred lp colorlp</B
+></P
></DD
><DT
><A
@@ -11140,7 +11932,7 @@ HREF="#DEFAULTCASE"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
->derault case
+>default case
</I
></TT
></A
@@ -11154,7 +11946,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
>See the section on <A
HREF="#AEN201"
>NAME
- MANGLING"</A
+ MANGLING</A
> for a fuller discussion.</P
></DD
><DT
@@ -11236,7 +12028,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
printable service nor a global print command, spool files will
be created but not processed and (most importantly) not removed.</P
><P
->Note that printing may fail on some UNIXs from the
+>Note that printing may fail on some UNIXes from the
<TT
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>nobody</TT
@@ -11381,29 +12173,6 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
></DD
><DT
><A
-NAME="PRINTERADMIN"
-></A
->printer admin (S)</DT
-><DD
-><P
->This is a list of users that can do anything to
- printers via the remote administration interfaces offered by MSRPC
- (usually using a NT workstation). Note that the root user always
- has admin rights.</P
-><P
->Default: <B
-CLASS="COMMAND"
->printer admin = &lt;empty string&gt;</B
->
- </P
-><P
->Example: <B
-CLASS="COMMAND"
->printer admin = admin, @staff</B
-></P
-></DD
-><DT
-><A
NAME="PRINTCAPNAME"
></A
>printcap name (G)</DT
@@ -11489,30 +12258,25 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
></DD
><DT
><A
-NAME="PRINTER"
+NAME="PRINTERADMIN"
></A
->printer (S)</DT
+>printer admin (S)</DT
><DD
><P
->This parameter specifies the name of the printer
- to which print jobs spooled through a printable service will be sent.</P
-><P
->If specified in the [global] section, the printer
- name given will be used for any printable service that does
- not have its own printer name specified.</P
+>This is a list of users that can do anything to
+ printers via the remote administration interfaces offered by MS-RPC
+ (usually using a NT workstation). Note that the root user always
+ has admin rights.</P
><P
->Default: <I
-CLASS="EMPHASIS"
->none (but may be <TT
-CLASS="CONSTANT"
->lp</TT
->
- on many systems)</I
-></P
+>Default: <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>printer admin = &lt;empty string&gt;</B
+>
+ </P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
->printer name = laserwriter</B
+>printer admin = admin, @staff</B
></P
></DD
><DT
@@ -11522,9 +12286,26 @@ NAME="PRINTERDRIVER"
>printer driver (S)</DT
><DD
><P
+><I
+CLASS="EMPHASIS"
+>Note :</I
+>This is a depreciated
+ parameter and will be removed in the next major release
+ following version 2.2. Please see the instructions in
+ <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>PRINTER_DRIVER2.txt</TT
+> in the <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>docs
+ </TT
+> of the Samba distribution for more information
+ on the new method of loading printer drivers onto a Samba server.
+ </P
+><P
>This option allows you to control the string
that clients receive when they ask the server for the printer driver
- associated with a printer. If you are using Windows95 or WindowsNT
+ associated with a printer. If you are using Windows95 or Windows NT
then you can use this to automate the setup of printers on your
system.</P
><P
@@ -11541,7 +12322,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
></A
> option set and the client will
give you a list of printer drivers. The appropriate strings are
- shown in a scrollbox after you have chosen the printer manufacturer.</P
+ shown in a scroll box after you have chosen the printer manufacturer.</P
><P
>See also <A
HREF="#PRINTERDRIVERFILE"
@@ -11566,6 +12347,23 @@ NAME="PRINTERDRIVERFILE"
>printer driver file (G)</DT
><DD
><P
+><I
+CLASS="EMPHASIS"
+>Note :</I
+>This is a depreciated
+ parameter and will be removed in the next major release
+ following version 2.2. Please see the instructions in
+ <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>PRINTER_DRIVER2.txt</TT
+> in the <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>docs
+ </TT
+> of the Samba distribution for more information
+ on the new method of loading printer drivers onto a Samba server.
+ </P
+><P
>This parameter tells Samba where the printer driver
definition file, used when serving drivers to Windows 95 clients, is
to be found. If this is not set, the default is :</P
@@ -11624,6 +12422,23 @@ NAME="PRINTERDRIVERLOCATION"
>printer driver location (S)</DT
><DD
><P
+><I
+CLASS="EMPHASIS"
+>Note :</I
+>This is a depreciated
+ parameter and will be removed in the next major release
+ following version 2.2. Please see the instructions in
+ <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>PRINTER_DRIVER2.txt</TT
+> in the <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>docs
+ </TT
+> of the Samba distribution for more information
+ on the new method of loading printer drivers onto a Samba server.
+ </P
+><P
>This parameter tells clients of a particular printer
share where to find the printer driver files for the automatic
installation of drivers for Windows 95 machines. If Samba is set up
@@ -11673,12 +12488,40 @@ NAME="PRINTERNAME"
>printer name (S)</DT
><DD
><P
+>This parameter specifies the name of the printer
+ to which print jobs spooled through a printable service will be sent.</P
+><P
+>If specified in the [global] section, the printer
+ name given will be used for any printable service that does
+ not have its own printer name specified.</P
+><P
+>Default: <I
+CLASS="EMPHASIS"
+>none (but may be <TT
+CLASS="CONSTANT"
+>lp</TT
+>
+ on many systems)</I
+></P
+><P
+>Example: <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>printer name = laserwriter</B
+></P
+></DD
+><DT
+><A
+NAME="PRINTER"
+></A
+>printer (S)</DT
+><DD
+><P
>Synonym for <A
-HREF="#PRINTER"
+HREF="#PRINTERNAME"
><TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
-> printer</I
+> printer name</I
></TT
></A
>.</P
@@ -11773,107 +12616,20 @@ HREF="#AEN78"
></DD
><DT
><A
-NAME="PRIVATEDIR"
+NAME="PROTOCOL"
></A
->private dir(G)</DT
+>protocol (G)</DT
><DD
><P
->The <TT
+>Synonym for <A
+HREF="#MAXPROTOCOL"
+> <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
->private dir</I
+>max protocol</I
></TT
-> parameter
- allows an administator to define a directory path used to hold the
- various databases Samba will use to store things like a the machine
- trust account information when acting as a domain member (i.e. where
- the secrets.tdb file will be located), where the passdb.tbd file
- will stored in the case of using the experiemental tdbsam support,
- etc...</P
-><P
->Default: <B
-CLASS="COMMAND"
->private dir = &lt;compile time location
- of smbpasswd&gt;</B
-></P
-><P
->Example: <B
-CLASS="COMMAND"
->private dir = /etc/smbprivate</B
-></P
-></DD
-><DT
-><A
-NAME="PROTOCOL"
></A
->protocol (G)</DT
-><DD
-><P
->The value of the parameter (a string) is the highest
- protocol level that will be supported by the server.</P
-><P
->Possible values are :</P
-><P
-></P
-><UL
-><LI
-><P
-><TT
-CLASS="CONSTANT"
->CORE</TT
->: Earliest version. No
- concept of user names.</P
-></LI
-><LI
-><P
-><TT
-CLASS="CONSTANT"
->COREPLUS</TT
->: Slight improvements on
- CORE for efficiency.</P
-></LI
-><LI
-><P
-><TT
-CLASS="CONSTANT"
->LANMAN1</TT
->: First <I
-CLASS="EMPHASIS"
-> modern</I
-> version of the protocol. Long filename
- support.</P
-></LI
-><LI
-><P
-><TT
-CLASS="CONSTANT"
->LANMAN2</TT
->: Updates to Lanman1 protocol.
- </P
-></LI
-><LI
-><P
-><TT
-CLASS="CONSTANT"
->NT1</TT
->: Current up to date version of
- the protocol. Used by Windows NT. Known as CIFS.</P
-></LI
-></UL
-><P
->Normally this option should not be set as the automatic
- negotiation phase in the SMB protocol takes care of choosing
- the appropriate protocol.</P
-><P
->Default: <B
-CLASS="COMMAND"
->protocol = NT1</B
-></P
-><P
->Example: <B
-CLASS="COMMAND"
->protocol = LANMAN1</B
-></P
+>.</P
></DD
><DT
><A
@@ -12299,10 +13055,10 @@ NAME="RESTRICTANONYMOUS"
but it doesn't. Setting it to true will force these anonymous
connections to be denied, and the client will be required to always
supply a username and password when connecting. Use of this parameter
- is only recommened for homogenous NT client environments.</P
+ is only recommended for homogeneous NT client environments.</P
><P
>This parameter makes the use of macro expansions that rely
- on the username (%U, %G, etc) consistant. NT 4.0
+ on the username (%U, %G, etc) consistent. NT 4.0
likes to use anonymous connections when refreshing the share list,
and this is a way to work around that.</P
><P
@@ -12452,6 +13208,12 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
></TT
></A
>.</P
+><P
+>Default: <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>root postexec = &lt;empty string&gt;
+ </B
+></P
></DD
><DT
><A
@@ -12467,8 +13229,8 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
></TT
>
parameter except that the command is run as root. This
- is useful for mounting filesystems
- (such as cdroms) after a connection is closed.</P
+ is useful for mounting filesystems (such as cdroms) after a
+ connection is closed.</P
><P
>See also <A
HREF="#PREEXEC"
@@ -12487,6 +13249,12 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
></TT
></A
>.</P
+><P
+>Default: <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>root preexec = &lt;empty string&gt;
+ </B
+></P
></DD
><DT
><A
@@ -12520,6 +13288,11 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
></TT
></A
>.</P
+><P
+>Default: <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>root preexec close = no</B
+></P
></DD
><DT
><A
@@ -13313,45 +14086,6 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
></DD
><DT
><A
-NAME="SHAREDMEMSIZE"
-></A
->shared mem size (G)</DT
-><DD
-><P
->It specifies the size of the shared memory (in
- bytes) to use between <A
-HREF="smbd.8.html"
-TARGET="_top"
->smbd(8)</A
->
- processes. This parameter defaults to one megabyte of shared
- memory. It is possible that if you have a large erver with many
- files open simultaneously that you may need to increase this
- parameter. Signs that this parameter is set too low are users
- reporting strange problems trying to save files (locking errors)
- and error messages in the smbd log looking like <I
-CLASS="EMPHASIS"
->ERROR
- smb_shm_alloc : alloc of XX bytes failed</I
->.</P
-><P
->If your OS refuses the size that Samba asks for then
- Samba will try a smaller size, reducing by a factor of 0.8 until
- the OS accepts it.</P
-><P
->Default: <B
-CLASS="COMMAND"
->shared mem size = 1048576</B
-></P
-><P
->Example: <B
-CLASS="COMMAND"
->shared mem size = 5242880 ; Set to 5mb for a
- large number of files.</B
-></P
-></DD
-><DT
-><A
NAME="SHORTPRESERVECASE"
></A
>short preserve case (S)</DT
@@ -13391,6 +14125,79 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
></DD
><DT
><A
+NAME="SHOWADDPRINTERWIZARD"
+></A
+>show add printer wizard (G)</DT
+><DD
+><P
+>With the introduction of MS-RPC based printing support
+ for Windows NT/2000 client in Samba 2.2, a "Printers..." folder will
+ appear on Samba hosts in the share listing. Normally this folder will
+ contain an icon for the MS Add Printer Wizard (APW). However, it is
+ possible to disable this feature regardless of the level of privilege
+ of the connected user.</P
+><P
+>Under normal circumstances, the Windows NT/2000 client will
+ open a handle on the printer server with OpenPrinterEx() asking for
+ Administrator privileges. If the user does not have administrative
+ access on the print server (i.e is not root or a member of the
+ <TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>printer admin</I
+></TT
+> group), the OpenPrinterEx()
+ call fails and the clients another open call with a request for
+ a lower privilege level. This should succeed, however the APW
+ icon will not be displayed.</P
+><P
+>Disabling the <TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>show add printer wizard</I
+></TT
+>
+ parameter will always cause the OpenPrinterEx() on the server
+ to fail. Thus the APW icon will never be displayed. <I
+CLASS="EMPHASIS"
+> Note :</I
+>This does not prevent the same user from having
+ administrative privilege on an individual printer.</P
+><P
+>See also <A
+HREF="#ADDPRINTERCOMMAND"
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>addprinter
+ command</I
+></TT
+></A
+>, <A
+HREF="#DELETEPRINTERCOMMAND"
+> <TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>deleteprinter command</I
+></TT
+></A
+>, <A
+HREF="#PRINTERADMIN"
+><TT
+CLASS="PARAMETER"
+><I
+>printer admin</I
+></TT
+></A
+></P
+><P
+>Default :<B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>show add printer wizard = yes</B
+></P
+></DD
+><DT
+><A
NAME="SMBPASSWDFILE"
></A
>smb passwd file (G)</DT
@@ -13402,13 +14209,13 @@ NAME="SMBPASSWDFILE"
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
->smb passwd file= &lt;compiled
- default&gt;</B
+>smb passwd file = ${prefix}/private/smbpasswd
+ </B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
->smb passwd file = /usr/samba/private/smbpasswd
+>smb passwd file = /etc/samba/smbpasswd
</B
></P
></DD
@@ -13436,7 +14243,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
->smbrun=&lt;compiled default&gt;
+>smbrun = ${prefix}/private/bin/smbrun
</B
></P
><P
@@ -14509,7 +15316,7 @@ CLASS="CONSTANT"
> LOG_DEBUG</TT
>.</P
><P
->This paramter sets the threshold for sending messages
+>This parameter sets the threshold for sending messages
to syslog. Only messages with debug level less than this value
will be sent to syslog.</P
><P
@@ -14716,12 +15523,12 @@ NAME="UNIXREALNAME"
><P
>This boolean parameter when set causes samba
to supply the real name field from the unix password file to
- the client. This isuseful for setting up mail clients and WWW
+ the client. This is useful for setting up mail clients and WWW
browsers on systems used by more than one person.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
->unix realname = no</B
+>unix realname = yes</B
></P
></DD
><DT
@@ -14928,7 +15735,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
of all users in the netgroup group of that name.</P
><P
>Note that searching though a groups database can take
- quite some time, snd some clients may time out during the
+ quite some time, and some clients may time out during the
search.</P
><P
>See the section <A
@@ -14941,7 +15748,7 @@ HREF="#AEN234"
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>The guest account if a guest service,
- else the name of the service.</B
+ else &lt;empty string&gt;.</B
></P
><P
>Examples:<B
@@ -14965,7 +15772,7 @@ NAME="USERNAMELEVEL"
><P
>If this parameter is set to non-zero the behavior changes.
This parameter is a number that specifies the number of uppercase
- combinations to try whilst trying to determine the UNIX user name. The
+ combinations to try while trying to determine the UNIX user name. The
higher the number the more combinations will be tried, but the slower
the discovery of usernames will be. Use this parameter when you have
strange usernames on your UNIX machine, such as <TT
@@ -15197,99 +16004,6 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS"
></DD
><DT
><A
-NAME="WINBINDCACHETIME"
-></A
->winbind cache time</DT
-><DD
-><P
-><I
-CLASS="EMPHASIS"
->NOTE:</I
-> this parameter is only
- available in Samba 3.0.</P
-><P
->This parameter specifies the number of seconds the
- <A
-HREF="winbindd.8.html"
-TARGET="_top"
->winbindd(8)</A
-> daemon will cache
- user and group information before querying a Windows NT server
- again.</P
-><P
->Default: <B
-CLASS="COMMAND"
->winbind cache type = 15</B
-></P
-></DD
-><DT
-><A
-NAME="WINBINDGID"
-></A
->winbind gid</DT
-><DD
-><P
-><I
-CLASS="EMPHASIS"
->NOTE:</I
-> this parameter is only
- available in Samba 3.0.</P
-><P
->The winbind gid parameter specifies the range of group
- ids that are allocated by the <A
-HREF="winbindd.8.html"
-TARGET="_top"
-> winbindd(8)</A
-> daemon. This range of group ids should have no
- existing local or nis groups within it as strange conflicts can
- occur otherwise.</P
-><P
->Default: <B
-CLASS="COMMAND"
->winbind gid = &lt;empty string&gt;
- </B
-></P
-><P
->Example: <B
-CLASS="COMMAND"
->winbind gid = 10000-20000</B
-></P
-></DD
-><DT
-><A
-NAME="WINBINDUID"
-></A
->winbind uid</DT
-><DD
-><P
-><I
-CLASS="EMPHASIS"
->NOTE:</I
-> this parameter is only
- available in Samba 3.0.</P
-><P
->The winbind gid parameter specifies the range of group
- ids that are allocated by the <A
-HREF="winbindd.8.html"
-TARGET="_top"
-> winbindd(8)</A
-> daemon. This range of ids should have no
- existing local or nis users within it as strange conflicts can
- occur otherwise.</P
-><P
->Default: <B
-CLASS="COMMAND"
->winbind uid = &lt;empty string&gt;
- </B
-></P
-><P
->Example: <B
-CLASS="COMMAND"
->winbind uid = 10000-20000</B
-></P
-></DD
-><DT
-><A
NAME="VALIDCHARS"
></A
>valid chars (G)</DT
@@ -15641,66 +16355,141 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
></DD
><DT
><A
-NAME="WINSPROXY"
+NAME="WINBINDCACHETIME"
></A
->wins proxy (G)</DT
+>winbind cache time</DT
><DD
><P
->This is a boolean that controls if <A
-HREF="nmbd.8.html"
+><I
+CLASS="EMPHASIS"
+>NOTE:</I
+> this parameter is only
+ available in Samba 3.0.</P
+><P
+>This parameter specifies the number of seconds the
+ <A
+HREF="winbindd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
->nmbd(8)</A
-> will respond to broadcast name
- queries on behalf of other hosts. You may need to set this
- to <TT
-CLASS="CONSTANT"
->yes</TT
-> for some older clients.</P
+>winbindd(8)</A
+> daemon will cache
+ user and group information before querying a Windows NT server
+ again.</P
><P
>Default: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
->wins proxy = no</B
+>winbind cache type = 15</B
></P
></DD
><DT
><A
-NAME="WINSSERVER"
+NAME="WINBINDGID"
></A
->wins server (G)</DT
+>winbind gid</DT
><DD
><P
->This specifies the IP address (or DNS name: IP
- address for preference) of the WINS server that <A
-HREF="nmbd.8.html"
+><I
+CLASS="EMPHASIS"
+>NOTE:</I
+> this parameter is only
+ available in Samba 3.0.</P
+><P
+>The winbind gid parameter specifies the range of group
+ ids that are allocated by the <A
+HREF="winbindd.8.html"
TARGET="_top"
-> nmbd(8)</A
-> should register with. If you have a WINS server on
- your network then you should set this to the WINS server's IP.</P
+> winbindd(8)</A
+> daemon. This range of group ids should have no
+ existing local or nis groups within it as strange conflicts can
+ occur otherwise.</P
><P
->You should point this at your WINS server if you have a
- multi-subnetted network.</P
+>Default: <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>winbind gid = &lt;empty string&gt;
+ </B
+></P
+><P
+>Example: <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>winbind gid = 10000-20000</B
+></P
+></DD
+><DT
+><A
+NAME="WINBINDSEPARATOR"
+></A
+>winbind separator</DT
+><DD
><P
><I
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
->NOTE</I
->. You need to set up Samba to point
- to a WINS server if you have multiple subnets and wish cross-subnet
- browsing to work correctly.</P
+>NOTE:</I
+> this parameter is only
+ available in Samba 3.0.</P
><P
->See the documentation file <TT
+>This parameter allows an admin to define the character
+ used when listing a username of the form of <TT
+CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
+><I
+>DOMAIN
+ </I
+></TT
+>\<TT
+CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
+><I
+>user</I
+></TT
+>. This parameter
+ is only applicable when using the <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
->BROWSING.txt</TT
->
- in the docs/ directory of your Samba source distribution.</P
+>pam_winbind.so</TT
+>
+ and <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>nss_winbind.so</TT
+> modules for UNIX services.
+ </P
><P
->Default: <I
+>Example: <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>winbind separator = \</B
+></P
+><P
+>Example: <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>winbind separator = +</B
+></P
+></DD
+><DT
+><A
+NAME="WINBINDUID"
+></A
+>winbind uid</DT
+><DD
+><P
+><I
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
->not enabled</I
+>NOTE:</I
+> this parameter is only
+ available in Samba 3.0.</P
+><P
+>The winbind gid parameter specifies the range of group
+ ids that are allocated by the <A
+HREF="winbindd.8.html"
+TARGET="_top"
+> winbindd(8)</A
+> daemon. This range of ids should have no
+ existing local or nis users within it as strange conflicts can
+ occur otherwise.</P
+><P
+>Default: <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>winbind uid = &lt;empty string&gt;
+ </B
></P
><P
>Example: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
->wins server = 192.9.200.1</B
+>winbind uid = 10000-20000</B
></P
></DD
><DT
@@ -15770,6 +16559,70 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
></DD
><DT
><A
+NAME="WINSPROXY"
+></A
+>wins proxy (G)</DT
+><DD
+><P
+>This is a boolean that controls if <A
+HREF="nmbd.8.html"
+TARGET="_top"
+>nmbd(8)</A
+> will respond to broadcast name
+ queries on behalf of other hosts. You may need to set this
+ to <TT
+CLASS="CONSTANT"
+>yes</TT
+> for some older clients.</P
+><P
+>Default: <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>wins proxy = no</B
+></P
+></DD
+><DT
+><A
+NAME="WINSSERVER"
+></A
+>wins server (G)</DT
+><DD
+><P
+>This specifies the IP address (or DNS name: IP
+ address for preference) of the WINS server that <A
+HREF="nmbd.8.html"
+TARGET="_top"
+> nmbd(8)</A
+> should register with. If you have a WINS server on
+ your network then you should set this to the WINS server's IP.</P
+><P
+>You should point this at your WINS server if you have a
+ multi-subnetted network.</P
+><P
+><I
+CLASS="EMPHASIS"
+>NOTE</I
+>. You need to set up Samba to point
+ to a WINS server if you have multiple subnets and wish cross-subnet
+ browsing to work correctly.</P
+><P
+>See the documentation file <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>BROWSING.txt</TT
+>
+ in the docs/ directory of your Samba source distribution.</P
+><P
+>Default: <I
+CLASS="EMPHASIS"
+>not enabled</I
+></P
+><P
+>Example: <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>wins server = 192.9.200.1</B
+></P
+></DD
+><DT
+><A
NAME="WINSSUPPORT"
></A
>wins support (G)</DT
@@ -15844,6 +16697,47 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
></DD
><DT
><A
+NAME="WRITECACHESIZE"
+></A
+>write cache size (S)</DT
+><DD
+><P
+>If this integer parameter is set to non-zero value,
+ Samba will create an in-memory cache for each oplocked file
+ (it does <I
+CLASS="EMPHASIS"
+>not</I
+> do this for
+ non-oplocked files). All writes that the client does not request
+ to be flushed directly to disk will be stored in this cache if possible.
+ The cache is flushed onto disk when a write comes in whose offset
+ would not fit into the cache or when the file is closed by the client.
+ Reads for the file are also served from this cache if the data is stored
+ within it.</P
+><P
+>This cache allows Samba to batch client writes into a more
+ efficient write size for RAID disks (ie. writes may be tuned to
+ be the RAID stripe size) and can improve performance on systems
+ where the disk subsystem is a bottleneck but there is free
+ memory for userspace programs.</P
+><P
+>The integer parameter specifies the size of this cache
+ (per oplocked file) in bytes.</P
+><P
+>Default: <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>write cache size = 0</B
+></P
+><P
+>Example: <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>write cache size = 262144</B
+></P
+><P
+>for a 256k cache size per file.</P
+></DD
+><DT
+><A
NAME="WRITELIST"
></A
>write list (S)</DT
@@ -15891,47 +16785,6 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
></DD
><DT
><A
-NAME="WRITECACHESIZE"
-></A
->write cache size (S)</DT
-><DD
-><P
->This integer parameter (new with Samba 2.0.7)
- if set to non-zero causes Samba to create an in-memory cache for
- each oplocked file (it does <I
-CLASS="EMPHASIS"
->not</I
-> do this for
- non-oplocked files). All writes that the client does not request
- to be flushed directly to disk will be stored in this cache if possible.
- The cache is flushed onto disk when a write comes in whose offset
- would not fit into the cache or when the file is closed by the client.
- Reads for the file are also served from this cache if the data is stored
- within it.</P
-><P
->This cache allows Samba to batch client writes into a more
- efficient write size for RAID disks (ie. writes may be tuned to
- be the RAID stripe size) and can improve performance on systems
- where the disk subsystem is a bottleneck but there is free
- memory for userspace programs.</P
-><P
->The integer parameter specifies the size of this cache
- (per oplocked file) in bytes.</P
-><P
->Default: <B
-CLASS="COMMAND"
->write cache size = 0</B
-></P
-><P
->Example: <B
-CLASS="COMMAND"
->write cache size = 262144</B
-></P
-><P
->for a 256k cache size per file.</P
-></DD
-><DT
-><A
NAME="WRITEOK"
></A
>write ok (S)</DT
@@ -16008,7 +16861,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
><DIV
CLASS="REFSECT1"
><A
-NAME="AEN5053"
+NAME="AEN5310"
></A
><H2
>WARNINGS</H2
@@ -16038,7 +16891,7 @@ TARGET="_top"
><DIV
CLASS="REFSECT1"
><A
-NAME="AEN5059"
+NAME="AEN5316"
></A
><H2
>VERSION</H2
@@ -16049,7 +16902,7 @@ NAME="AEN5059"
><DIV
CLASS="REFSECT1"
><A
-NAME="AEN5062"
+NAME="AEN5319"
></A
><H2
>SEE ALSO</H2
@@ -16128,7 +16981,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
><DIV
CLASS="REFSECT1"
><A
-NAME="AEN5082"
+NAME="AEN5339"
></A
><H2
>AUTHOR</H2
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/smbclient.1.html b/docs/htmldocs/smbclient.1.html
index fec617f9745..f9cc6085d8d 100644
--- a/docs/htmldocs/smbclient.1.html
+++ b/docs/htmldocs/smbclient.1.html
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ NAME="AEN8"
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbclient</B
-> {servicename} [-b &lt;buffer size&gt;] [-d debuglevel] [-D Directory] [-S server] [-U username] [-W workgroup] [-M &lt;netbios name&gt;] [-m maxprotocol] [-A authfile] [-N] [-l logfile] [-L &lt;netbios name&gt;] [-I destinationIP] [-E &lt;terminal code&gt;] [-c &lt;command string&gt;] [-i scope] [-O &lt;socket options&gt;] [-p port] [-R &lt;name resolve order&gt;] [-s &lt;smb config file&gt;] [-T&lt;c|x&gt;IXFqgbNan] [password]</P
+> {servicename} [password] [-b &lt;buffer size&gt;] [-d debuglevel] [-D Directory] [-S server] [-U username] [-W workgroup] [-M &lt;netbios name&gt;] [-m maxprotocol] [-A authfile] [-N] [-l logfile] [-L &lt;netbios name&gt;] [-I destinationIP] [-E &lt;terminal code&gt;] [-c &lt;command string&gt;] [-i scope] [-O &lt;socket options&gt;] [-p port] [-R &lt;name resolve order&gt;] [-s &lt;smb config file&gt;] [-T&lt;c|x&gt;IXFqgbNan]</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="REFSECT1"
@@ -189,7 +189,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
options. </P
></DD
><DT
->name resolve order (G)</DT
+>-R &lt;name resolve order&gt;</DT
><DD
><P
>This option is used by the programs in the Samba
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/smbmnt.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/smbmnt.8.html
index 051684a291b..88a28b8a696 100644
--- a/docs/htmldocs/smbmnt.8.html
+++ b/docs/htmldocs/smbmnt.8.html
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ VLINK="#840084"
ALINK="#0000FF"
><H1
><A
-NAME="SMBUMOUNT"
+NAME="SMBMNT"
>smbmnt</A
></H1
><DIV
@@ -35,13 +35,13 @@ NAME="AEN8"
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
->smbumount</B
-> {mount-point} [-s &lt;share&gt;] [-r] [-u &lt;uid&gt;] [-g &lt;gid&gt;] [-f &lt;mask&gt;] [-d &lt;mask&gt;]</P
+>smbmnt</B
+> {mount-point} [-s &lt;share&gt;] [-r] [-u &lt;uid&gt;] [-g &lt;gid&gt;] [-f &lt;mask&gt;] [-d &lt;mask&gt;] [-o &lt;options&gt;]</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="REFSECT1"
><A
-NAME="AEN18"
+NAME="AEN19"
></A
><H2
>DESCRIPTION</H2
@@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
><DIV
CLASS="REFSECT1"
><A
-NAME="AEN27"
+NAME="AEN28"
></A
><H2
>OPTIONS</H2
@@ -120,17 +120,28 @@ CLASS="VARIABLELIST"
>specify the octal directory mask
applied </P
></DD
+><DT
+>-o options</DT
+><DD
+><P
+> list of options that are passed as-is to smbfs, if this
+ command is run on a 2.4 or higher linux kernel.
+ </P
+></DD
></DL
></DIV
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="REFSECT1"
><A
-NAME="AEN50"
+NAME="AEN55"
></A
><H2
>AUTHOR</H2
><P
+>Volker Lendecke, Andrew Tridgell, Michael H. Warfield
+ and others.</P
+><P
>The current maintainer of smbfs and the userspace
tools <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
@@ -146,7 +157,14 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
HREF="mailto:urban@teststation.com"
TARGET="_top"
>Urban Widmark</A
->.</P
+>.
+ The <A
+HREF="mailto:samba@samba.org"
+TARGET="_top"
+>SAMBA Mailing list</A
+>
+ is the preferred place to ask questions regarding these programs.
+ </P
><P
>The conversion of this manpage for Samba 2.2 was performed
by Gerald Carter</P
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/smbmount.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/smbmount.8.html
index 94a4ae8bc88..ba07f08ed47 100644
--- a/docs/htmldocs/smbmount.8.html
+++ b/docs/htmldocs/smbmount.8.html
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ NAME="AEN5"
></A
><H2
>Name</H2
->smbmount&nbsp;--&nbsp;mount and smbfs filesystem</DIV
+>smbmount&nbsp;--&nbsp;mount an smbfs filesystem</DIV
><DIV
CLASS="REFSYNOPSISDIV"
><A
@@ -60,8 +60,17 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
> command when using the
"-t smb" option. The kernel must support the smbfs filesystem. </P
><P
->Options to smbmount are specified as a comma separated list
- of key=value pairs.</P
+>Options to smbmount are specified as a comma separated
+ list of key=value pairs. It is possible to send options other
+ than those listed here, assuming that smbfs supports them. If
+ you get mount failures, check your kernel log for errors on
+ unknown options.</P
+><P
+>smbmount is a daemon. After mounting it keeps running until
+ the mounted smbfs is umounted. It will log things that happen
+ when in daemon mode using the "machine name" smbmount, so
+ typically this output will end up in log.smbmount. The
+ smbmount process may also be called mount.smbfs.</P
><P
><I
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
@@ -83,7 +92,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
><DIV
CLASS="REFSECT1"
><A
-NAME="AEN26"
+NAME="AEN27"
></A
><H2
>OPTIONS</H2
@@ -97,26 +106,50 @@ CLASS="VARIABLELIST"
><DD
><P
>specifies the username to connect as. If
- this is not given then the environment variable <TT
-CLASS="PARAMETER"
-><I
-> $USER</I
-></TT
-> is used. This option can also take the
- form "user%password" or "user/workgroup" or
- "user/workgroup%password" to allow the password and workgroup
+ this is not given, then the environment variable <TT
+CLASS="ENVAR"
+> USER</TT
+> is used. This option can also take the
+ form "user%password" or "user/workgroup" or
+ "user/workgroup%password" to allow the password and workgroup
to be specified as part of the username.</P
></DD
><DT
>password=&lt;arg&gt;</DT
><DD
><P
->specifies the SMB password. If not given then
- <B
+>specifies the SMB password. If this
+ option is not given then the environment variable
+ <TT
+CLASS="ENVAR"
+>PASSWD</TT
+> is used. If it can find
+ no password <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbmount</B
-> will prompt for a passeword, unless
- the guest option is given. </P
+> will prompt
+ for a passeword, unless the guest option is
+ given. </P
+></DD
+><DT
+>credentials=&lt;filename&gt;</DT
+><DD
+><P
+>specifies a file that contains a username
+ and/or password. The format of the file is:</P
+><P
+> <PRE
+CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
+> username = &lt;value&gt;
+ password = &lt;value&gt;
+ </PRE
+>
+ </P
+><P
+>This is preferred over having passwords in plaintext in a
+ shared file, such as /etc/fstab. Be sure to protect any
+ credentials file properly.
+ </P
></DD
><DT
>netbiosname=&lt;arg&gt;</DT
@@ -129,7 +162,8 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
>uid=&lt;arg&gt;</DT
><DD
><P
->sets the uid that files will be mounted as.
+>sets the uid that will own all files on
+ the mounted filesystem.
It may be specified as either a username or a numeric uid.
</P
></DD
@@ -137,7 +171,8 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
>gid=&lt;arg&gt;</DT
><DD
><P
->sets the gid that files will be mounted as.
+>sets the gid that will own all files on
+ the mounted filesystem.
It may be specified as either a groupname or a numeric
gid. </P
></DD
@@ -228,17 +263,125 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><P
>mount read-write </P
></DD
+><DT
+>iocharset=&lt;arg&gt;</DT
+><DD
+><P
+> sets the charset used by the linux side for codepage
+ to charset translations (NLS). Argument should be the
+ name of a charset, like iso8859-1. (Note: only kernel
+ 2.4.0 or later)
+ </P
+></DD
+><DT
+>codepage=&lt;arg&gt;</DT
+><DD
+><P
+> sets the codepage the server uses. See the iocharset
+ option. Example value cp850. (Note: only kernel 2.4.0
+ or later)
+ </P
+></DD
+><DT
+>ttl=&lt;arg&gt;</DT
+><DD
+><P
+> how long a directory listing is cached in milliseconds
+ (also affects visibility of file size and date
+ changes). A higher value means that changes on the
+ server take longer to be noticed but it can give
+ better performance on large directories, especially
+ over long distances. Default is 1000ms but something
+ like 10000ms (10 seconds) is probably more reasonable
+ in many cases.
+ (Note: only kernel 2.4.2 or later)
+ </P
+></DD
></DL
></DIV
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="REFSECT1"
><A
-NAME="AEN98"
+NAME="AEN119"
+></A
+><H2
+>ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES</H2
+><P
+>The variable <TT
+CLASS="ENVAR"
+>USER</TT
+> may contain the username of the
+ person using the client. This information is used only if the
+ protocol level is high enough to support session-level
+ passwords. The variable can be used to set both username and
+ password by using the format username%password.</P
+><P
+>The variable <TT
+CLASS="ENVAR"
+>PASSWD</TT
+> may contain the password of the
+ person using the client. This information is used only if the
+ protocol level is high enough to support session-level
+ passwords.</P
+><P
+>The variable <TT
+CLASS="ENVAR"
+>PASSWD_FILE</TT
+> may contain the pathname of
+ a file to read the password from. A single line of input is
+ read and used as password.</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="REFSECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN127"
+></A
+><H2
+>BUGS</H2
+><P
+>Not many known smbmount bugs. But one smbfs bug is
+ important enough to mention here anyway:</P
+><P
+></P
+><UL
+><LI
+><P
+>Mounts sometimes stop working. This is usually
+ caused by smbmount terminating. Since smbfs needs smbmount to
+ reconnect when the server disconnects, the mount will go
+ dead. A re-mount normally fixes this. At least 2 ways to
+ trigger this bug are known.</P
+></LI
+></UL
+><P
+>Note that the typical response to a bugreport is suggestion
+ to try the latest version first. So please try doing that first,
+ and always include which versions you use of relevant software
+ when reporting bugs (minimum: samba, kernel, distribution)</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="REFSECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN134"
+></A
+><H2
+>SEE ALSO</H2
+><P
+>Documentation/filesystems/smbfs.txt in the kernel source tree
+ may contain additional options and information.</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="REFSECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN137"
></A
><H2
>AUTHOR</H2
><P
+>Volker Lendecke, Andrew Tridgell, Michael H. Warfield
+ and others.</P
+><P
>The current maintainer of smbfs and the userspace
tools <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
@@ -254,7 +397,14 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
HREF="mailto:urban@teststation.com"
TARGET="_top"
>Urban Widmark</A
-></P
+>.
+ The <A
+HREF="mailto:samba@samba.org"
+TARGET="_top"
+>SAMBA Mailing list</A
+>
+ is the preferred place to ask questions regarding these programs.
+ </P
><P
>The conversion of this manpage for Samba 2.2 was performed
by Gerald Carter</P
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/smbspool.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/smbspool.8.html
index 4c62c3dac76..321cc5d8d62 100644
--- a/docs/htmldocs/smbspool.8.html
+++ b/docs/htmldocs/smbspool.8.html
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ VLINK="#840084"
ALINK="#0000FF"
><H1
><A
-NAME="SMBSPOOL"
+NAME="FINDSMB"
>smbspool</A
></H1
><DIV
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@ NAME="AEN5"
></A
><H2
>Name</H2
->smbspool&nbsp;--&nbsp;send print file to an SMB printer</DIV
+>nmblookup&nbsp;--&nbsp;send print file to an SMB printer</DIV
><DIV
CLASS="REFSYNOPSISDIV"
><A
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/smbumount.8.html b/docs/htmldocs/smbumount.8.html
index cdecec69a19..0a26e720945 100644
--- a/docs/htmldocs/smbumount.8.html
+++ b/docs/htmldocs/smbumount.8.html
@@ -105,6 +105,9 @@ NAME="AEN28"
><H2
>AUTHOR</H2
><P
+>Volker Lendecke, Andrew Tridgell, Michael H. Warfield
+ and others.</P
+><P
>The current maintainer of smbfs and the userspace
tools <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
@@ -120,7 +123,14 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
HREF="mailto:urban@teststation.com"
TARGET="_top"
>Urban Widmark</A
->.</P
+>.
+ The <A
+HREF="mailto:samba@samba.org"
+TARGET="_top"
+>SAMBA Mailing list</A
+>
+ is the preferred place to ask questions regarding these programs.
+ </P
><P
>The conversion of this manpage for Samba 2.2 was performed
by Gerald Carter</P
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/using_samba/licenseinfo.html b/docs/htmldocs/using_samba/licenseinfo.html
index 71bc74def8b..7e8962a8325 100644
--- a/docs/htmldocs/using_samba/licenseinfo.html
+++ b/docs/htmldocs/using_samba/licenseinfo.html
@@ -38,8 +38,8 @@ should read:
O'Reilly & Associates. This material may be distributed only
subject to the terms and conditions set forth in the
license, which is presently available at
- <a href="http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/samba/chapter/licenseinfo.html">
- http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/samba/chapter/licenseinfo.html</a>.
+ <a href="http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/samba/licenseinfo.html">
+ http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/samba/licenseinfo.html</a>.
</blockquote>
<p>
For an excerpt, the reference should read:
@@ -50,8 +50,8 @@ For an excerpt, the reference should read:
and published by O'Reilly & Associates. This material may be
distributed only subject to the terms and conditions set
forth in the license, which is presently available at
- <a href="http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/samba/chapter/licenseinfo.html">
- http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/samba/chapter/licenseinfo.html</a>.
+ <a href="http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/samba/licenseinfo.html">
+ http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/samba/licenseinfo.html</a>.
</blockquote>
<p>
Translations must contain similar references in the target
@@ -64,8 +64,8 @@ the following:
published by O'Reilly & Associates. This material may be
distributed only subject to the terms and conditions set
forth in the license, which is presently available at
- <a href="http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/samba/chapter/licenseinfo.html">
- http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/samba/chapter/licenseinfo.html</a>.
+ <a href="http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/samba/licenseinfo.html">
+ http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/samba/licenseinfo.html</a>.
</blockquote>
<p>
Both commercial and noncommercial redistribution of material
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/using_samba/this_edition.html b/docs/htmldocs/using_samba/this_edition.html
index 839f65737a0..71522ac31e1 100644
--- a/docs/htmldocs/using_samba/this_edition.html
+++ b/docs/htmldocs/using_samba/this_edition.html
@@ -31,8 +31,8 @@ By Robert Eckstein, David Collier-Brown & Peter Kelly
O'Reilly & Associates. This material may be distributed only
subject to the terms and conditions set forth in the
license, which is presently available at
- <a href="http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/samba/chapter/licenseinfo.html">
- http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/samba/chapter/licenseinfo.html</a>.
+ <a href="http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/samba/licenseinfo.html">
+ http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/samba/licenseinfo.html</a>.
</blockquote>
<hr size=1 noshade>
diff --git a/docs/htmldocs/winbind.html b/docs/htmldocs/winbind.html
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..2f023561edc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/docs/htmldocs/winbind.html
@@ -0,0 +1,490 @@
+<HTML
+><HEAD
+><TITLE
+>Unifed Logons between Windows NT and UNIX using Winbind</TITLE
+><META
+NAME="GENERATOR"
+CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.57"></HEAD
+><BODY
+CLASS="ARTICLE"
+BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
+TEXT="#000000"
+LINK="#0000FF"
+VLINK="#840084"
+ALINK="#0000FF"
+><DIV
+CLASS="ARTICLE"
+><DIV
+CLASS="TITLEPAGE"
+><H1
+CLASS="TITLE"
+><A
+NAME="AEN1"
+>Unifed Logons between Windows NT and UNIX using Winbind</A
+></H1
+><HR></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN3"
+>Abstract</A
+></H1
+><P
+>Integration of UNIX and Microsoft Windows NT through
+ a unified logon has been considered a "holy grail" in heterogeneous
+ computing environments for a long time. We present <I
+CLASS="EMPHASIS"
+>winbind
+ </I
+>, a component of the Samba suite of programs as a
+ solution to the unied logon problem. Winbind uses a UNIX implementation
+ of Microsoft RPC calls, Pluggable Authentication Modules, and the Name
+ Service Switch to allow Windows NT domain users to appear and operate
+ as UNIX users on a UNIX machine. This paper describes the winbind
+ system, explaining the functionality it provides, how it is configured,
+ and how it works internally.</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><HR><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN7"
+>Introduction</A
+></H1
+><P
+>It is well known that UNIX and Microsoft Windows NT have
+ different models for representing user and group information and
+ use different technologies for implementing them. This fact has
+ made it difficult to integrate the two systems in a satisfactory
+ manner.</P
+><P
+>One common solution in use today has been to create
+ identically named user accounts on both the UNIX and Windows systems
+ and use the Samba suite of programs to provide file and print services
+ between the two. This solution is far from perfect however, as
+ adding and deleting users on both sets of machines becomes a chore
+ and two sets of passwords are required both of which which
+ can lead to synchronization problems between the UNIX and Windows
+ systems and confusion for users.</P
+><P
+>We divide the unifed logon problem for UNIX machines into
+ three smaller problems:</P
+><P
+></P
+><UL
+><LI
+><P
+>Obtaining Windows NT user and group information
+ </P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>Authenticating Windows NT users
+ </P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>Password changing for Windows NT users
+ </P
+></LI
+></UL
+><P
+>Ideally, a prospective solution to the unified logon problem
+ would satisfy all the above components without duplication of
+ information on the UNIX machines and without creating additional
+ tasks for the system administrator when maintaining users and
+ groups on either system. The winbind system provides a simple
+ and elegant solution to all three components of the unifed logon
+ problem.</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><HR><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN20"
+>What Winbind Provides</A
+></H1
+><P
+>Winbind unifies UNIX and Windows NT account management by
+ allowing a UNIX box to become a full member of a NT domain. Once
+ this is done the UNIX box will see NT users and groups as if
+ they were native UNIX users and groups, allowing the NT domain
+ to be used in much the same manner that NIS+ is used within
+ UNIX-only environments.</P
+><P
+>The end result is that whenever any
+ program on the UNIX machine asks the operating system to lookup
+ a user or group name, the query will be resolved by asking the
+ NT domain controller for the specied domain to do the lookup.
+ Because Winbind hooks into the operating system at a low level
+ (via the NSS name resolution modules in the C library) this
+ redirection to the NT domain controller is completely
+ transparent.</P
+><P
+>Users on the UNIX machine can then use NT user and group
+ names as they would use "native" UNIX names. They can chown files
+ so that they are owned by NT domain users or even login to the
+ UNIX machine and run a UNIX X-Window session as a domain user.</P
+><P
+>The only obvious indication that Winbind is being used is
+ that user and group names take the form DOMAIN\user and
+ DOMAIN\group. This is necessary as it allows Winbind to determine
+ that redirection to a domain controller is wanted for a particular
+ lookup and which trusted domain is being referenced.</P
+><P
+>Additionally, Winbind provides a authentication service
+ that hooks into the Pluggable Authentication Modules (PAM) system
+ to provide authentication via a NT domain to any PAM enabled
+ applications. This capability solves the problem of synchronizing
+ passwords between systems as all passwords are stored in a single
+ location (on the domain controller).</P
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><HR><H2
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><A
+NAME="AEN27"
+>Target Uses</A
+></H2
+><P
+>Winbind is targeted at organizations that have an
+ existing NT based domain infrastructure into which they wish
+ to put UNIX workstations or servers. Winbind will allow these
+ organizations to deploy UNIX workstations without having to
+ maintain a separate account infrastructure. This greatly simplies
+ the administrative overhead of deploying UNIX workstations into
+ a NT based organization.</P
+><P
+>Another interesting way in which we expect Winbind to
+ be used is as a central part of UNIX based appliances. Appliances
+ that provide file and print services to Microsoft based networks
+ will be able to use Winbind to provide seamless integration of
+ the appliance into the domain.</P
+></DIV
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><HR><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN31"
+>How Winbind Works</A
+></H1
+><P
+>The winbind system is designed around a client/server
+ architecture. A long running <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>winbindd</B
+> daemon
+ listens on a UNIX domain socket waiting for requests
+ to arrive. These requests are generated by the NSS and PAM
+ clients and processed sequentially.</P
+><P
+>The technologies used to implement winbind are described
+ in detail below.</P
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><HR><H2
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><A
+NAME="AEN36"
+>Microsoft Remote Procedure Calls</A
+></H2
+><P
+>Over the last two years, efforts have been underway
+ by various Samba Team members to decode various aspects of
+ the Microsoft Remote Procedure Call (MSRPC) system. This
+ system is used for most network related operations between
+ Windows NT machines including remote management, user authentication
+ and print spooling. Although initially this work was done
+ to aid the implementation of Primary Domain Controller (PDC)
+ functionality in Samba, it has also yielded a body of code which
+ can be used for other purposes.</P
+><P
+>Winbind uses various MSRPC calls to enumerate domain users
+ and groups and to obtain detailed information about individual
+ users or groups. Other MSRPC calls can be used to authenticate
+ NT domain users and to change user passwords. By directly querying
+ a Windows PDC for user and group information, winbind maps the
+ NT account information onto UNIX user and group names.</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><HR><H2
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><A
+NAME="AEN40"
+>Name Service Switch</A
+></H2
+><P
+>The Name Service Switch, or NSS, is a feature that is
+ present in many UNIX operating systems. It allows system
+ information such as hostnames, mail aliases and user information
+ to be resolved from dierent sources. For example, a standalone
+ UNIX workstation may resolve system information from a series of
+ flat files stored on the local lesystem. A networked workstation
+ may first attempt to resolve system information from local files,
+ then consult a NIS database for user information or a DNS server
+ for hostname information.</P
+><P
+>The NSS application programming interface allows winbind
+ to present itself as a source of system information when
+ resolving UNIX usernames and groups. Winbind uses this interface,
+ and information obtained from a Windows NT server using MSRPC
+ calls to provide a new source of account enumeration. Using standard
+ UNIX library calls, one can enumerate the users and groups on
+ a UNIX machine running winbind and see all users and groups in
+ a NT domain plus any trusted domain as though they were local
+ users and groups.</P
+><P
+>The primary control le for NSS is <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>/etc/nsswitch.conf
+ </TT
+>. When a UNIX application makes a request to do a lookup
+ the C library looks in <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>/etc/nsswitch.conf</TT
+>
+ for a line which matches the service type being requested, for
+ example the "passwd" service type is used when user or group names
+ are looked up. This config line species which implementations
+ of that service should be tried andin what order. If the passwd
+ config line is:</P
+><P
+><B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>passwd: files example</B
+></P
+><P
+>then the C library will first load a module called
+ <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>/lib/libnss_files.so</TT
+> followed by
+ the module <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>/lib/libnss_example.so</TT
+>. The
+ C library will dynamically load each of these modules in turn
+ and call resolver functions within the modules to try to resolve
+ the request. Once the request is resolved the C library returns the
+ result to the application.</P
+><P
+>This NSS interface provides a very easy way for Winbind
+ to hook into the operating system. All that needs to be done
+ is to put <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>libnss_winbind.so</TT
+> in <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>/lib/</TT
+>
+ then add "winbind" into <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>/etc/nsswitch.conf</TT
+> at
+ the appropriate place. The C library will then call Winbind to
+ resolve user and group names.</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><HR><H2
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><A
+NAME="AEN56"
+>Pluggable Authentication Modules</A
+></H2
+><P
+>Pluggable Authentication Modules, also known as PAM,
+ is a system for abstracting authentication and authorization
+ technologies. With a PAM module it is possible to specify different
+ authentication methods for dierent system applications without
+ having to recompile these applications. PAM is also useful
+ for implementing a particular policy for authorization. For example,
+ a system administrator may only allow console logins from users
+ stored in the local password file but only allow users resolved from
+ a NIS database to log in over the network.</P
+><P
+>Winbind uses the authentication management and password
+ management PAM interface to integrate Windows NT users into a
+ UNIX system. This allows Windows NT users to log in to a UNIX
+ machine and be authenticated against a suitable Primary Domain
+ Controller. These users can also change their passwords and have
+ this change take eect directly on the Primary Domain Controller.
+ </P
+><P
+>PAM is congured by providing control files in the directory
+ <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>/etc/pam.d/</TT
+> for each of the services that
+ require authentication. When an authentication request is made
+ by an application the PAM code in the C library looks up this
+ control file to determine what modules to load to do the
+ authentication check and in what order. This interface makes adding
+ a new authentication service for Winbind very easy, all that needs
+ to be done is that the <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>pam_winbind.so</TT
+> module
+ is copied to <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>/lib/security/</TT
+> and the pam
+ control files for relevant services are updated to allow
+ authentication via winbind. See the PAM documentation
+ for more details.</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><HR><H2
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><A
+NAME="AEN64"
+>User and Group ID Allocation</A
+></H2
+><P
+>When a user or group is created under Windows NT
+ is it allocated a numerical relative identier (RID). This is
+ slightly dierent to UNIX which has a range of numbers which are
+ used to identify users, and the same range in which to identify
+ groups. It is winbind's job to convert RIDs to UNIX id numbers and
+ vice versa. When winbind is congured it is given part of the UNIX
+ user id space and a part of the UNIX group id space in which to
+ store Windows NT users and groups. If a Windows NT user is
+ resolved for the first time, it is allocated the next UNIX id from
+ the range. The same process applies for Windows NT groups. Over
+ time, winbind will have mapped all Windows NT users and groups
+ to UNIX user ids and group ids.</P
+><P
+>The results of this mapping are stored persistently in
+ a ID mapping database held in a tdb database). This ensures that
+ RIDs are mapped to UNIX IDs in a consistent way.</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><HR><H2
+CLASS="SECT2"
+><A
+NAME="AEN68"
+>Result Caching</A
+></H2
+><P
+>An active system can generate a lot of user and group
+ name lookups. To reduce the network cost of these lookups winbind
+ uses a caching scheme based on the SAM sequence number supplied
+ by NT domain controllers. User or group information returned
+ by a PDC is cached by winbind along with a sequence number also
+ returned by the PDC. This sequence number is incremented by
+ Windows NT whenever any user or group information is modied. If
+ a cached entry has expired, the sequence number is requested from
+ the PDC and compared against the sequence number of the cached entry.
+ If the sequence numbers do not match, then the cached information
+ is discarded and up to date information is requested directly
+ from the PDC.</P
+></DIV
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><HR><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN71"
+>Installation and Configuration</A
+></H1
+><P
+>The easiest way to install winbind is by using the packages
+ provided in the <TT
+CLASS="FILENAME"
+>pub/samba/appliance/</TT
+>
+ directory on your nearest
+ Samba mirror. These packages provide snapshots of the Samba source
+ code and binaries already setup to provide the full functionality
+ of winbind. This setup is a little more complex than a normal Samba
+ build as winbind needs a small amount of functionality from a
+ development code branch called SAMBA_TNG.</P
+><P
+>Once you have installed the packages you should read
+ the <B
+CLASS="COMMAND"
+>winbindd(8)</B
+> man page which will provide you
+ with conguration information and give you sample conguration files.
+ You may also wish to update the main Samba daemons smbd and nmbd)
+ with a more recent development release, such as the recently
+ announced Samba 2.2 alpha release.</P
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><HR><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN77"
+>Limitations</A
+></H1
+><P
+>Winbind has a number of limitations in its current
+ released version which we hope to overcome in future
+ releases:</P
+><P
+></P
+><UL
+><LI
+><P
+>Winbind is currently only available for
+ the Linux operating system, although ports to other operating
+ systems are certainly possible. For such ports to be feasible,
+ we require the C library of the target operating system to
+ support the Name Service Switch and Pluggable Authentication
+ Modules systems. This is becoming more common as NSS and
+ PAM gain support among UNIX vendors.</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>The mappings of Windows NT RIDs to UNIX ids
+ is not made algorithmically and depends on the order in which
+ unmapped users or groups are seen by winbind. It may be difficult
+ to recover the mappings of rid to UNIX id mapping if the file
+ containing this information is corrupted or destroyed.</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>Currently the winbind PAM module does not take
+ into account possible workstation and logon time restrictions
+ that may be been set for Windows NT users.</P
+></LI
+><LI
+><P
+>Building winbind from source is currently
+ quite tedious as it requires combining source code from two Samba
+ branches. Work is underway to solve this by providing all
+ the necessary functionality in the main Samba code branch.</P
+></LI
+></UL
+></DIV
+><DIV
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><HR><H1
+CLASS="SECT1"
+><A
+NAME="AEN89"
+>Conclusion</A
+></H1
+><P
+>The winbind system, through the use of the Name Service
+ Switch, Pluggable Authentication Modules, and appropriate
+ Microsoft RPC calls have allowed us to provide seamless
+ integration of Microsoft Windows NT domain users on a
+ UNIX system. The result is a great reduction in the administrative
+ cost of running a mixed UNIX and NT network.</P
+></DIV
+></DIV
+></BODY
+></HTML
+> \ No newline at end of file